eci telecombg-30 bg-20 and bg-64

434
LCT-BGF User Manual Version 11 426006-2422-113-A00

Upload: andrew-pirlo

Post on 06-Jul-2016

591 views

Category:

Documents


128 download

DESCRIPTION

overview of eci adm

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF

User Manual

Version 11

426006-2422-113-A00

Page 2: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual V11 Catalog No: X37713 July 2009 1st Edition © Copyright by ECI Telecom, 2002-2009. All rights reserved worldwide. This is a legal agreement between you, the end user, and ECI Telecom Ltd. (“ECI Telecom”). BY OPENING THE DOCUMENTATION AND/OR DISK PACKAGE, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, PROMPTLY RETURN THE UNOPENED DOCUMENTATION AND/OR DISK PACKAGE AND THE ACCOMPANYING ITEMS (INCLUDING WRITTEN MATERIALS AND BINDERS OR OTHER CONTAINERS), TO THE PLACE FROM WHICH YOU OBTAINED THEM. The information contained in the documentation and/or disk is proprietary and is subject to all relevant copyright, patent, and other laws protecting intellectual property, as well as any specific agreement protecting ECI Telecom's rights in the aforesaid information. Neither this document nor the information contained in the documentation and/or disk may be published, reproduced, or disclosed to third parties, in whole or in part, without the express prior written permission of ECI Telecom. In addition, any use of this document, the documentation and/or the disk, or the information contained therein for any purposes other than those for which it was disclosed, is strictly forbidden. ECI Telecom reserves the right, without prior notice or liability, to make changes in equipment design or specifications. Information supplied by ECI Telecom is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no responsibility whatsoever is assumed by ECI Telecom for the use thereof, nor for the rights of third parties, which may be affected in any way by the use and/or dissemination thereof. Any representation(s) in the documentation and/or disk concerning performance of ECI Telecom product(s) are for informational purposes only and are not warranties of product performance or otherwise, either express or implied. ECI Telecom's standard limited warranty, stated in its sales contract or order confirmation form, is the only warranty offered by ECI Telecom. The documentation and/or disk is provided “AS IS” and may contain flaws, omissions, or typesetting errors. No warranty is granted nor liability assumed in relation thereto, unless specifically undertaken in ECI Telecom's sales contract or order confirmation. Information contained in the documentation and in the disk is periodically updated, and changes will be incorporated in subsequent editions. If you have encountered an error, please notify ECI Telecom. All specifications are subject to change without prior notice. The documentation and/or disk and all information contained therein is owned by ECI Telecom and is protected by all relevant copyright, patent, and other applicable laws and international treaty provisions. Therefore, you must treat the information contained in the documentation and disk as any other copyrighted material (for example, a book or musical recording). Other Restrictions. You may not rent, lease, sell, or otherwise dispose of the documentation and disk, as applicable. YOU MAY NOT USE, COPY, MODIFY, OR TRANSFER THE DOCUMENTATION AND/OR DISK OR ANY COPY IN WHOLE OR PART, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS LICENSE. ALL RIGHTS NOT EXPRESSLY GRANTED ARE RESERVED BY ECI TELECOM. All trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective holders. ECI Telecom shall not be liable to you or to any other party for any loss or damage whatsoever or howsoever caused, arising directly or indirectly in connection with this documentation and/or disk, the information contained therein, its use, or otherwise. Notwithstanding the generality of the aforementioned, you expressly waive any claim and/or demand regarding liability for indirect, special, incidental, or consequential loss or damage which may arise in respect of the documentation and/or disk and/or the information contained therein, howsoever caused, even if advised of the possibility of such damages. The end user hereby undertakes and acknowledges that they read the "Before You Start/Safety Guidelines" instructions and that such instructions were understood by them. It is hereby clarified that ECI Telecom shall not be liable to you or to any other party for any loss or damage whatsoever or howsoever caused, arising directly or indirectly in connection with you fulfilling and/or failed to fulfill in whole or in part the "Before You Start/Safety Guidelines" instructions.

Page 3: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary iii

Contents About this Manual ..................................................................... vii 

Intended Audience .............................................................................................. vii Document Objectives ......................................................................................... vii Document Contents ........................................................................................... viii Related Publications ............................................................................................ ix Technical Support ................................................................................................ ix 

  Introducing the LCT-BGF ........................................................ 1-1 

Overview ........................................................................................................... 1-1 Hardware and Software Requirements ............................................................ 1-2 System Components ........................................................................................ 1-2 

  Installing the LCT-BGF ............................................................ 2-1 

Overview ........................................................................................................... 2-1 Installing the LCT-BGF Application .................................................................. 2-2 

  Using the Boot Configuration Tool ........................................ 3-1 

Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-1 Boot Configuration Tool Procedures ................................................................ 3-2 Downloading Embedded Software and the FPGA File for the BG-40/BG-20 ... 3-7 Downloading Embedded Software for the BG-30/BG-64 ............................... 3-10 Obtaining MAC Data for the BG-30/BG-64 ..................................................... 3-12 Obtaining IDPROM Data ................................................................................ 3-13 Formatting NVRAM ........................................................................................ 3-14 Obtaining NVRAM Information for the BG-30/BG-64 ..................................... 3-15 Configuring the No Recovery Next Startup Attribute ...................................... 3-16 Configuring the Serial Port Close Attribute ..................................................... 3-17 

  Getting Started ......................................................................... 4-1 

Overview ........................................................................................................... 4-1 Starting the LCT Client ..................................................................................... 4-2 Configuring Parameters .................................................................................... 4-4 Configuring Static IP Routes ............................................................................ 4-5 

Page 4: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Contents LCT-BGF User Manual

iv ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

  Configuring and Managing NEs ............................................. 5-1 

Overview ........................................................................................................... 5-1 Workflow ........................................................................................................... 5-2 Card Assignment .............................................................................................. 5-2 Routing Table ................................................................................................... 5-7 Managing OSPF ............................................................................................... 5-9 Setting the NE Time ....................................................................................... 5-20 Configuring Communication Parameters ........................................................ 5-21 Configuring NE Attributes ............................................................................... 5-32 Setting the Card Maximum Traffic for the BG-40 ........................................... 5-33 Resetting NEs ................................................................................................. 5-34 NE Data Backup ............................................................................................. 5-35 

  Configuring Timing Source .................................................... 6-1 

Overview ........................................................................................................... 6-1 Configuring the Synchronous Timing Table ..................................................... 6-2 Configuring PCM Timing .................................................................................. 6-4 

  Configuring and Managing Cards .......................................... 7-1 

Overview ........................................................................................................... 7-1 Workflow ........................................................................................................... 7-1 Working with Cards .......................................................................................... 7-2 Managing the BG_OW ................................................................................... 7-16 PDH Cards ..................................................................................................... 7-19 SDH Cards ..................................................................................................... 7-22 Data Cards ..................................................................................................... 7-30 PCM Cards ................................................................................................... 7-136 Control Cards ............................................................................................... 7-142 Power Units .................................................................................................. 7-147 Fan Control Units .......................................................................................... 7-148 

  Managing MPLS Services ....................................................... 8-1 

Overview ........................................................................................................... 8-1 Workflow ........................................................................................................... 8-3 Supported Cards .............................................................................................. 8-3 Managing Tunnels ............................................................................................ 8-4 Creating MPLS Services ................................................................................ 8-43 Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) .......................................................... 8-76 Configuring ACL Profile .................................................................................. 8-94 Fast ReRoute (FRR) ....................................................................................... 8-96 

Page 5: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Contents

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary v

  Managing Cross Connections ................................................ 9-1 

Overview ........................................................................................................... 9-1 Workflow ........................................................................................................... 9-1 Creating XC ...................................................................................................... 9-2 Managing the XC List ..................................................................................... 9-18 Configuring SNCP Attributes .......................................................................... 9-23 

  Fault Management ................................................................. 10-1 

Overview ......................................................................................................... 10-1 Workflow ......................................................................................................... 10-2 Configuring Fault Management ...................................................................... 10-2 Managing Current Alarms ............................................................................. 10-11 Managing Unreported Alarms ....................................................................... 10-20 Managing NE Alarms Log ............................................................................. 10-22 BIT Codes ..................................................................................................... 10-24 Viewing PPI Status ....................................................................................... 10-25 

  Monitoring Performance ....................................................... 11-1 

Overview ......................................................................................................... 11-1 Performance Data .......................................................................................... 11-1 Workflow ......................................................................................................... 11-3 Viewing Performance Data ............................................................................. 11-3 Configuring Performance Attributes ............................................................... 11-7 

  Managing LCT-BGF Security ................................................ 12-1 

Overview ......................................................................................................... 12-1 Configuring the LCT-BGF Work Mode ........................................................... 12-2 

  Performing Maintenance Operations ................................... 13-1 

Overview ......................................................................................................... 13-1 Workflow ......................................................................................................... 13-1 Preventive Maintenance Operations .............................................................. 13-2 Perform Card Maintenance ............................................................................ 13-6 MSP 1+1 Maintenance Operation .................................................................. 13-8 Managing SNCP Attributes ............................................................................. 13-9 Perform Transmission Object Maintenance Operations ............................... 13-10 Perform Maintenance on Timing .................................................................. 13-17 

Page 6: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Contents LCT-BGF User Manual

vi ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

  Performing Advanced Configuration ................................... 14-1 

Overview ......................................................................................................... 14-1 Enabling the BG-40 NE Proxy ARP ................................................................ 14-2 Configuring the BG-40 NE ARP Table ........................................................... 14-3 Displaying Channel MIB Counters .................................................................. 14-5 Configuring the BG-40 NE Serial Port ............................................................ 14-6 Performing a Software Upgrade for the BG-40/BG-20 ................................... 14-7 Performing a Software Upgrade for the BG-30/BG-64 ................................... 14-9 Clearing the Flash ........................................................................................ 14-11 Configuring the Trap Manager Table ............................................................ 14-12 Configuring SNMP Agent Mode ................................................................... 14-14 Clearing Reset .............................................................................................. 14-15 

  Managing Licenses ................................................................ 15-1 

Overview ......................................................................................................... 15-1 License Control Mechanism ........................................................................... 15-1 

 

Page 7: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary vii

In this chapter: Intended Audience ............................................................................................ viiDocument Objectives ........................................................................................ viiDocument Contents.......................................................................................... viiiRelated Publications .......................................................................................... ixTechnical Support .............................................................................................. ix

Intended Audience The LCT-BGF User Manual is intended for BG-40/BG-20/BG-20C/BG-30/BG-64 equipment installation personnel and field engineers.

Document Objectives This book provides basic operating instructions for ECI Telecom LCT-BGF platform.

About this Manual

Page 8: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

About this Manual LCT-BGF User Manual

viii ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Document Contents This document contains the following sections:

Introducing the LCT-BGF (on page 1-1) presents a general description of the LCT-BGF and its main operational and technical features

Installing the LCT-BGF (on page 2-1) describes how to install the LCT-BGF

Using the Boot Configuration Tool (on page 3-1) describes the procedures available in the Boot Configuration Tool facility for configuring a new network element (NE)

Getting Started (on page 4-1) provides a comprehensive description of GUI functionality for the LCT-BGF

Configuring and Managing NEs (on page 5-1) describes how to configure and manage network elements, external network elements and other devices in the network

Configuring Timing Source (on page 6-1) describes how to configure the synchronous timing sources and timing table used by the system

Configuring and Managing Cards (on page 7-1) describes how to configure card attributes, view card-related information

Managing MPLS Services (on page 8-1) describes how to configure and manage cards with MPLS services

Managing Cross Connects (on page 9-1) describes how to create and manage XC, as well as the procedure for exporting and importing SNC files

Fault Management (on page 10-1) describes alarm management functions

Monitoring Performance (on page 11-1) describes the LCT-BGF performance monitoring mechanisms, including viewing current and recent performance

Managing LCT-BGF Security (on page 12-1) describes LCT-BGF security measures and how to configure them

Performing Maintenance Operations (on page 13-1) describes how to perform standard maintenance, such as loopbacks, path payload tests, and consistency and connectivity checks

Performing Advanced Configuration (on page 14-1) describes the advanced options available for advanced users

Managing License (on page 15-1) describes license control mechanism in LCT-BGF and embedded software

Page 9: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual About this Manual

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary ix

Related Publications The following publications may be of assistance to you regarding LCT-BGF operations:

BroadGate Product Line General Description BroadGate Product Line System Specifications BG-40 Miniature MSPP for Metro-Access General Description BroadGate BG-20 Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manual BroadGate BG-30 Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manual BroadGate BG-40 Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manual BroadGate EMS-BGF Installation Guide BroadGate EMS-BGF User Manual LightSoft Network Management System User Manual EMS-BGF License Control

Technical Support The configuration, installation, and operation of the LCT-BGF and its operation in a network are highly specialized processes. Due to the different nature of each installation, some planning aspects may not be covered in this manual.

If you have questions or concerns about your network design or if you require installation personnel to perform the actual installation process, ECI Telecom maintains a staff of design engineers and highly trained field service personnel. The services of this group are available to customers at any time.

If you are interested in obtaining design assistance or a network installation plan from ECI Telecom’s Customer Support team, contact your ECI Telecom sales representative. With any support related issues, technical or logistic, please contact the ECI Telecom Customer Support center at your location. If you are not familiar with that location, please contact our central customer support center action line at:

+972-3- 92660001-888- ECI-TECH (324- 8324)

+972-3- 92663701-954-351- 4406

[email protected] (mailto:[email protected])

ECI's XDM_ and BroadGate_ product lines are certified to comply with MEF9 and MEF14 standards.

Page 10: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

About this Manual LCT-BGF User Manual

x ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Page 11: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 1-1

In this chapter: Overview .......................................................................................................... 1-1Hardware and Software Requirements ............................................................ 1-2System Components ........................................................................................ 1-2

Overview The LCT-BGF supplements the EMS-BGF for several vital functions, including initial configuration of an element, by providing the address IDs (it can also be used when performing software upgrades on element cards).

The LCT-BGF system is based on the TCP/IP protocol and is connected to the SDH network element (NE) via the Ethernet port provided by the MCU. It implements NE configuration and maintenance management functions and coordinates with the EMS-BGF to perform management for error correction facilities.

The LCT-BGF software is used to perform initial data configuration and equipment software download for BG-40, BG-20, BG-30 and BG-64 NEs. Maintenance personnel can modify parameters of an operating NE to detect and solve specific problems within the element.

1 Introducing the LCT-BGF

Page 12: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Introducing the LCT-BGF LCT-BGF User Manual

1-2 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Hardware and Software Requirements

The hardware and software requirements for LCT-BGF are listed as below:

Computer: PC or laptop with Core Duo CPU, with 2G Memory and 250 GB hard disk memory

Operating system: Windows XP Professional or Vista

Interface protocol: TCP/IP-based socket communication

Communication interface: Connects with the main control unit of the equipment via a 10BaseT Ethernet interface

System Components The system package consists of the following software and hardware modules:

The LCT GUI and Boot Configuration Tool software running on the Microsoft Windows operating system, which acts as a graphical user interface between the BG-40, BG-20, and BG-30 equipment and the user

The boot software running on the BOOT ROM of the BG-40, BG-20, BG-30 or BG-64 equipment, which acts as a boot configuration server

The license key

Page 13: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-1

In this chapter: Overview .......................................................................................................... 2-1Installing the LCT-BGF Application ............................................................... 2-2

Overview This section describes the installation procedure for the LCT-BGF.

2 Installing the LCT-BGF

Page 14: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Installing the LCT-BGF LCT-BGF User Manual

2-2 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Installing the LCT-BGF Application

The LCT-BGF can be installed on Windows XP Professional or Vista operating systems.

To install the LCT-BGF:

1. Insert the supplied CD in the CD-ROM drive. The LCT-BGF Installation CD window opens.

2. Select Install LCT-BGF. The Welcome window opens.

Page 15: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Installing the LCT-BGF

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-3

3. Click Next. The Choose Destination Location window opens.

Click Choose to select a specific folder for the installation files. The default location is:"C:\LCT-BGF".

4. Click Next. The Ready to Install the Program window opens.

Page 16: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Installing the LCT-BGF LCT-BGF User Manual

2-4 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

5. Click Install to begin the installation. The bar in the Setup Status window shows the progress of the installation.

6. When the installation is completed, the following window opens.

Page 17: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Installing the LCT-BGF

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-5

7. Click Finish. The following window opens. It will take a few minutes to initializing LCT-BGF database.

8. After finishing initializing the LCT-BGF database, the LCT-BGF

installation process is complete.

NOTE: Installation of the LCT-BGF can be done without the license key. However, subsequent activation of the software will be prevented.

Page 18: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Installing the LCT-BGF LCT-BGF User Manual

2-6 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Page 19: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-1

In this chapter: Overview .......................................................................................................... 3-1Boot Configuration Tool Procedures ............................................................... 3-2Downloading Embedded Software and the FPGA File for the BG-40/BG-20 3-7Downloading Embedded Software for the BG-30/BG-64 ............................. 3-10Obtaining MAC Data for the BG-30/BG-64 ................................................ 3-12Obtaining IDPROM Data .............................................................................. 3-13Formatting NVRAM ...................................................................................... 3-14Obtaining NVRAM Information for the BG-30/BG-64 ................................ 3-15Configuring the No Recovery Next Startup Attribute ................................... 3-16Configuring the Serial Port Close Attribute ................................................... 3-17

Overview This section describes how to log in and utilize the Boot Configuration Tool, which is used for the initial configuration of BG-40, BG-20, BG-20C, BG-30 and BG-64 NEs.

3 Using the Boot Configuration

Tool

Page 20: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Using the Boot Configuration Tool LCT-BGF User Manual

3-2 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Boot Configuration Tool Procedures

Use the following procedure to log in to the Boot Configuration Tool.

To log in to the Boot Configuration Tool:

1. Make sure LCT-BGF application has the license key.

2. Connect your PC to the local BG-40, BG-20, BG-20C, BG-30 or BG-64 element via the dedicated MNG Ethernet port.

3. On your Windows desktop, double-click the LCTBase icon . The main Boot Configuration Tool window opens.

Page 21: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Using the Boot Configuration Tool

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-3

4. Click Login in the upper-left corner of the window. The Input IP window opens.

5. Select a card by selecting the relevant radio button.

6. Enter the IP address of the NE in the IP field and click Connect. The IP address is a serial number behind the NE equipment.

7. The BG-40/BG-20/BG-20C/BG-30/BG-64 NE assumes the boot status for approximately four to five seconds after resetting. The Boot Configuration Tool logs in the NE automatically and the following Information window appears, confirming automatic login.

After main controls reset or a power-on restart occurs, the Boot program is initiated. When the Alarm LED of the main (MXC) board starts flashing, you have five seconds to perform a login. Otherwise, you will miss the login opportunity. The boot-state login can be performed on a local NE only.

NOTE: If the hardware license key is not plugged in to one of the USB ports, the software only works for two minutes before freezing until the key is installed.

Page 22: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Using the Boot Configuration Tool LCT-BGF User Manual

3-4 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Configuring Parameters After a successful login to the Boot Configuration Tool, you can configure basic parameters, as described in the following table. Basic parameters terminology

Field name Description

NE ID The unique identification for a BG-40, BG-20, BG-20C, BG-30 or BG-64 element. NE ID has two bytes, with a valid range from 1 to 4095, except for 2, which is used by the XDM. The NE ID is in decimal format.

MAC address The MAC address is factory-set and appears as read-only. NE mode An NE has three modes: Gateway, DCC-only, and Ethernet-

only: Gateway mode: NE accessible via the Ethernet IP address

or the DCC IP address DCC-only mode: NE accessible only via the DCC IP

address Ethernet-only mode: NE accessible only via the Ethernet IP

address

Ethernet port IP This address is valid for the Gateway mode and Ethernet-only mode. In a gateway NE, this provides internal router functionality. It has two IP addresses: one for the DCC port (NE IP address) and the other for the Ethernet port. These two addresses must belong to different subnets. The rule in setting an Ethernet port IP address is that it must belong to the same subnet as the IP address for the host LCT-BGF connected to it.

Page 23: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Using the Boot Configuration Tool

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-5

To configure basic parameters:

1. In the Boot Configuration Tool main window, select Configuration > Basic Parameter Configuration. The Basic Parameter Configuration window opens.

Page 24: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Using the Boot Configuration Tool LCT-BGF User Manual

3-6 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

2. Click Get. The Boot Configuration Tool retrieves the configuration data from the equipment and a confirmation window appears.

3. Click Set. The Boot Configuration Tool sends the configuration data to the

equipment and a confirmation window appears.

Page 25: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Using the Boot Configuration Tool

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-7

Downloading Embedded Software and the FPGA File for the BG-40/BG-20

The embedded software is the control software on the NE cards. The FPGA file is the programmable file supporting hardware on the cards. Embedded software is located in the element’s upper/lower-area memories, whereas the FPGA file is located in the file memory.

To download embedded software:

1. In the Boot Configuration Tool window, select Configuration > Download Embedded Software. The Download Embedded Software window opens.

The fields in this window are:

Download version to: located in the Up bank and Down bank Active Area: currently activated area used in conjunction with the

above area Set NE restart mode:select a mode how the NE restart

Page 26: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Using the Boot Configuration Tool LCT-BGF User Manual

3-8 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

2. Click Select version file to select the filename to be downloaded. Select the Up Bank or Down bank radio button for the software download location. This selection should always be different from the Active Area when reverting back to the original software.

3. Click Download to download the software to the equipment. A confirmation window appears.

4. After software download, select a mode for the NE to restart in Step 3. To retrieve the information, click Get. If it is OK, click Apply to activate the software.

5. If you don't click Get or Apply in Step 3, there pops up the NE Restart mode window when you close the window.

Select which mode you want to restart the NE and click Confirm.

Page 27: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Using the Boot Configuration Tool

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-9

To download an FPGA file:

1. In the Boot Configuration Tool window, select Configuration > Download FPGA File. The Download FPGA File window opens.

2. Click Select File to select the FPGA filename to be downloaded.

3. Click Download.

4. Click Close to exit.

Page 28: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Using the Boot Configuration Tool LCT-BGF User Manual

3-10 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Downloading Embedded Software for the BG-30/BG-64

The embedded software is the control software on the NE cards. The FPGA file is the programmable file supporting hardware on the cards. Embedded software is located in the NE's upper/lower-area memories. The embedded software includes the FPGA file.

To download embedded software:

1. In the Boot Configuration Tool window, select Configuration > Download Embedded Software. The Software Upgrade window opens.

Page 29: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Using the Boot Configuration Tool

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-11

The fields in this window are:

Version Info: Upper Area, Lower Area, Flash Boot, and RAM Boot information

Version activation: currently activated area used in conjunction with the Embedded area

Version download: used to download embedded software to the equipment

2. In the Version Info area, click View to retrieve the version information from the equipment.

3. In the Version activation area, set the version activation and click Apply. Click Get to retrieve the version activation information from the equipment. To delete the NE database, click Delete NE database. If you don't select any operation in this area, the following window opens when you close the window.

4. In the Version download area, click Select File to select the filename to be

downloaded. Select the Up or Down radio button in the Target Area for the software download location. This selection should always be different from the Version activation area when reverting back to the original software.

5. Click Download to download the software to the equipment.

6. After a software download, click Apply to activate the software.

Page 30: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Using the Boot Configuration Tool LCT-BGF User Manual

3-12 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Obtaining MAC Data for the BG-30/BG-64

Use the following procedure to obtain MAC data for the BG-30/BG-64 NE.

To obtain MAC data:

In the Boot Configuration Tool window, select Configuration > Get MAC. The Boot Configuration Tool retrieves the MAC data from the equipment and displays it in the MAC Address window.

Page 31: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Using the Boot Configuration Tool

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-13

Obtaining IDPROM Data Use the following procedure to obtain IDPROM data for the BG-20/BG-20C/BG-30/BG-64 NE. IDPROM data is stored in the EEPROM, which records relevant hardware information.

To get IDPROM data:

In the Boot Configuration Tool window, select Configuration > Get IDPROM. The Boot Configuration Tool retrieves the IDPROM data from the equipment and displays it in the IDPROM window.

Page 32: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Using the Boot Configuration Tool LCT-BGF User Manual

3-14 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Formatting NVRAM Use the following procedure to format NVRAM.

To format NVRAM:

1. In the Boot Configuration Tool window, select Configuration > Format NVRAM. The Format NVRAM window opens.

2. In the Format Area field, select either the boot or data radio button to

indicate the area to be formatted.

3. Click Apply. The Boot Configuration Tool sends the format command to the equipment.

Page 33: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Using the Boot Configuration Tool

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-15

Obtaining NVRAM Information for the BG-30/BG-64

Use the following procedure to obtain NVRAM information from the equipment for BG-30/BG-64 NEs.

To obtain NVRAM information:

In the Boot Configuration Tool window, select Configuration > Get NVRAM Info. The Boot Configuration Tool retrieves the NVRAM data from the equipment and displays it in the NVRAM Info window.

Page 34: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Using the Boot Configuration Tool LCT-BGF User Manual

3-16 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Configuring the No Recovery Next Startup Attribute

When the No Recovery Next Startup attribute is enabled, the NE restarts using the default configuration instead of the current configuration.

To configure the No Recovery Next Startup attribute:

1. In the Boot Configuration Tool window, select Configuration > No Recovery Next Startup. The No Recovery Next Startup window opens.

2. Select the No Recovery Next Startup checkbox for the NE to restart using

the default configuration instead of the current configuration. Clear this checkbox for the NE to restart using the current configuration.

3. Click Get to retrieves the No Recovery Next Startup attribute from the equipment.

4. Click Apply. The Boot Configuration Tool sends the No Recovery Next Startup attribute to the equipment.

Page 35: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Using the Boot Configuration Tool

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-17

Configuring the Serial Port Close Attribute

When the Serial Port Close attribute is enabled, the serial port is closed in order not to disturb the main board’s normal operation. When this attribute is disabled, the serial port is open and you can view debug information from the serial out port.

To configure the Serial Port Close attribute:

1. In the Boot Configuration Tool window, select Configuration > Serial Port Close Flag. The Serial Port Close Flag window opens.

2. Select the Serial Port Close checkbox if you want the serial port to be

closed. Clear this checkbox for the serial port to remain open, which enables you to view debug information from the serial out port.

3. Click Get to retrieves the Serial Port Close attribute from the equipment.

4. Click Apply. The Boot Configuration Tool sends the Serial Port Close attribute to the equipment.

Page 36: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Using the Boot Configuration Tool LCT-BGF User Manual

3-18 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Page 37: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-1

In this chapter: Overview .......................................................................................................... 4-1Starting the LCT Client .................................................................................... 4-2Configuring Parameters ................................................................................... 4-4Configuring Static IP Routes ........................................................................... 4-5

Overview The LCT GUI is essentially an element management system (EMS) interface for the BG-40, BG-20, BG-30 or BG-64 and performs typical management functions.

NOTE: Multiple methods are available in the LCT-BGF for accessing and performing many operations. The following standard methods are available:

Selecting a menu command Clicking a toolbar icon Double-clicking an object Right-clicking an object (such as an NE) and then selecting

the relevant right-click menu option

Operational procedures throughout this guide typically specify only one access method. Be aware that other methods may apply when performing a given operation.

4 Getting Started

Page 38: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Getting Started LCT-BGF User Manual

4-2 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Starting the LCT Client Use the following procedure to log in to the LCT-BGF interface.

To log in to the LCT:

1. Make sure the LCT-BGF application has the license key.

2. Connect the PC to the gateway BG-40/BG-20/BG-20C/BG-30/BG-64 NE via the designated MNG Ethernet port.

3. Double-click the LCT-BGF shortcut icon on your desktop. The LCT-BGF login window opens with a progress bar showing the progress of starting the server.

4. After the server successfully starts, a small computer icon appears in the

task bar, as shown in the following figure. Double-click this icon to open the LCT-BGF server and to view the status of each running LCT-BGF service.

5. In the login window, enter the NE IP address and Password.

6. Select the checkbox of Full Upload NE Data to upload NE data if needed.

7. Click Ping for the LCT to attempt to connect to the NE.

Page 39: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Getting Started

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-3

8. If successful, click OK to log in to the NE. A Confirm window opens with the confirmation that whether you want to update the license.

9. Click Yes to continue. Then the EMS Server IP and Port window opens.

If you are a valid user and EMS-BGF has been installed, enter the EMS-BGF Server IP and Port in the corresponding fields and click OK.

Page 40: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Getting Started LCT-BGF User Manual

4-4 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Configuring Parameters After successful login to the LCT software, you can configure the following parameters:

Basic parameters: NE ID, NE MAC address, NE mode, Ethernet port IP, Ethernet port mask

Static IP routes

To configure parameters:

1. In the BG-40 NE shelf view window, select Advanced > Basic Parameter Configuration. The Basic Parameter Configuration window opens.

2. Click to retrieve the configuration data from the equipment.

Page 41: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Getting Started

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-5

Configuring Static IP Routes When several NEs are managed by the LCT-BGF, you should set the static IP Routes for the NE.

To configure static IP routes:

1. In the BG-40 NE shelf view window, select Advanced > Static IP Route Table. The Static IP Routes Configuration window opens.

2. Click to add the new static IP routes.

3. Enter the Destination Network IP, Subnet Mask, and Next Hop IP.

4. To delete a static IP route, select the static IP route entry that you want to delete in the list and click .

5. To edit a static IP route, select the route in the list and click .

6. Click to retrieve the static IP routes from the equipment.

7. Click Apply to send the static IP routes to the equipment.

Page 42: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Getting Started LCT-BGF User Manual

4-6 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Page 43: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-1

In this chapter: Overview .......................................................................................................... 5-1Workflow ......................................................................................................... 5-2Card Assignment ............................................................................................. 5-2Routing Table .................................................................................................. 5-7Managing OSPF ............................................................................................... 5-9Setting the NE Time ...................................................................................... 5-20Configuring Communication Parameters ...................................................... 5-21Configuring NE Attributes ............................................................................. 5-32Setting the Card Maximum Traffic for the BG-40 ........................................ 5-33Resetting NEs ................................................................................................ 5-34NE Data Backup ............................................................................................ 5-35

Overview NE configuration configures attributes, services, and relevant functions for an unconfigured (initial default status) NE, according to requirements of the networking application. The NE’s configuration data determines all the actions of the NE.

During NE configuration, the NE configuration database is defined and set up. Before service configuration can be performed on an NE, relevant attributes and parameters must be set, such as the NE attribute and the card attribute. A configuration wizard is provided for this purpose.

5 Configuring and Managing

NEs

Page 44: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing NEs LCT-BGF User Manual

5-2 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Workflow A single NE includes the following classified configuration contents:

NE attributes

Card assignment

Service configuration

Clock synchronization configuration

Card attribute configuration

Card electronic label

Protection attribute configuration

Alarm-related attributes configuration

Performance-related attributes configuration

Card Assignment

Overview Card assignment involves assigning card types for various slots (or a subcard slot) of the NE equipment, setting up objects corresponding to the physical cards in the LCT-BGF and setting the corresponding values for them, and displaying icons in the LCT-BGF window. Corresponding card attributes and services can only be configured after card assignment is completed.

Card assignment makes offline configuration of the LCT-BGF possible. You can conduct all the offline operations after saving the expected logical slots.

The following terms relate to the card assignment process:

Logical slot: The logical slot is defined from the top down. This defines the expected configuration and is both readable and writable.

Physical slot: The physical slot is the actual configuration of the current NE equipment, and is read-only.

Card assignment: Card assignment installs the logical slot. You can either manually configure the logical slot, one slot after another, or first obtain the actual physical slot and then install the logical slot in modification mode.

Page 45: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing NEs

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-3

Card Assignment for BG-20 and BG-30 The BG-20 has two units – the basic unit (BG-20B) and an extension unit (BG-20E), which can be stacked together. When a BG-20 NE is created in the LCT-BGF, it is configured as the BG-20B, and the shelf view window only displays the BG-20B shelf. You can change the configuration to the BG-20E during slot assignment by selecting the BG-20E. This action changes the NE icon in the topology view to the BG-20E icon, and the NE Shelf View window is refreshed to reflect the change.

The BG-30 applies the same concepts as the BG-20. The BG-30 has two units – a basic unit (BG-30B) and an extension unit (BG-30E), which can be stacked together.

To perform slot assignment for the BG-20 and the BG-30:

1. In the BG-20 or BG-30 NE shelf view window, select Configuration > Slot Assignment in the main menu. The Slot Assignment window opens.

2. If the NE is a BG-20E/BG-30E, select the BG20E/BG-30E checkbox.

Page 46: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing NEs LCT-BGF User Manual

5-4 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

3. Right-click on a slot in the window, select Add and then select a card in the popped list to assign. Select Delete to delete the card.

4. After adding the corresponding card type in the corresponding slot, click

Apply.

5. Click Get Logical Card to get the expected configuration from database. Click Get Physical Card to get the actual configuration from the equipment. If you want to set the physical cards as logical cards, click Set As Logical.

Page 47: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing NEs

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-5

Card Assignment for BG-64 BG-64 is a low cost, miniature, redundant ADM-64 Multiple Service Transport Platform (MSTP) for NGN (MSAN), Cellular hub migration, Ethernet aggregation and TDM.

To perform slot assignment for the BG-64:

1. In the BG-64 NE shelf view window, select Configuration > Slot Assignment in the main menu. The Slot Assignment window opens.

2. Right-click on a slot in the window, select Add and then select a card in the

popped list to assign. Select Delete to delete the card.

3. After adding the corresponding card type in the corresponding slot, click

Apply.

4. Click Get Logical Card to get the expected configuration from database. Click Get Physical Card to get the actual configuration from the equipment. If you want to set the physical cards as logical cards, click Set As Logical.

Page 48: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing NEs LCT-BGF User Manual

5-6 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Card Assignment for BG-40 This section describes how to perform slot assignment for the BG-40.

To perform slot assignment for the BG-40:

1. In the BG-40 NE shelf view window, select Configuration > Slot Assignment in the main menu. The Slot Assignment window opens.

2. Right-click on a slot in the window, select Add and then select a card in the

popped list to assign. Select Delete to delete the card.

3. After adding the corresponding card type in the corresponding slot, click

Apply.

4. Click Get Logical Card to get the expected configuration from database. Click Get Physical Card to get the actual configuration from the equipment. If you want to set the physical cards as logical cards, click Set As Logical.

Page 49: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing NEs

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-7

Routing Table

Viewing Actual Routes You can view the actual IP routes of the BG-30 and BG-64 NE.

To view the actual routes of a BG-30/BG-64 NE:

1. In a BG-30/BG-64 NE shelf view window, select Configuration > Routing Table from the menu. The following window opens.

Click to retrieve the information to view.

Page 50: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing NEs LCT-BGF User Manual

5-8 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Managing Static Routes You can view, add, and delete static IP routing entries for the BG-30/BG-64 NE.

To manage the static routes:

1. In the BG-30/BG-64 NE shelf view window, select Configuration > Routing Table from the menu. From the opened Routing Table window, select the Static Routes tab.

2. To add a new IP route, select from the toolbar. The Create Static IP Route window opens.

Enter the relevant IPs as needed and click OK to apply the setting.

3. To delete a static route, select the route you want to delete in the list and select from the toolbar.

4. Click to retrieve the information to view.

Page 51: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing NEs

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-9

Managing OSPF OSPF is a routing protocol that determines the best path for routing IP traffic over a TCP/IP network, based on distance/metric between nodes. OSPF is an Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) that works within an Autonomous System (AS). It is a link state protocol capable of handling large networks with little protocol traffic overhead.

OSPF Overview OSPF management is only supported for the BG-30 and BG-64 in EMS-BGF.

OSPF supports the following network connections:

DCC

Gateway

Clear Channel

The following functions are supported by OSPF:

Point-to-Point and Broadcast interfaces

Up to four OSPF areas

Address summarization

Area Border Router (ABR) functionality

Autonomous System Border Router (ASBR) functionality, including redistribution of Static Routes

Loopback address as Router ID

Configuration of Hello Protocol parameters

Support of "passive" interfaces to allow distribution of routes to attached devices

Page 52: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing NEs LCT-BGF User Manual

5-10 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

To access the OSPF management window:

In a BG-30 or BG-64 NE shelf view window, select the NE in the left object tree, then select Configuration > IP Networking from the menu. The IP Networking window opens as shown in the following figure.

Page 53: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing NEs

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-11

Overall OSPF This section describes how to configure overall OSPF settings.

To configure overall OSPF settings:

1. In a BG-30 or BG-64 NE shelf view window, select the NE in the left object tree, then select Configuration > IP Networking in the menu. Select the Overall OSPF tab in the opened window.

The areas in this window are described as follows:

OSPF Enable: state of OSPF, Enable or Disable. The default is Disable.

AS Border Router: state of ASBR, Enable or Disable. The default is Disable. When it is set, OSPF advertises its static routes.

OSPF Area ID: comprises 1 to 4 distinct areas coded as 32-bit integers and displayed as IP addresses. By default, first row of the table shows the backbone area (0.0.0.0). User can add and remove OSPF areas from table. There are two constraints for this attribute:

There is at least one row in the table. Areas used in an area range or defined for an OSPF interface cannot

be removed.

Page 54: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing NEs LCT-BGF User Manual

5-12 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

OSPF Area Range Table: supports up to 12 distinct area ranges. Area ranges are used to summarize NEs advertised over area boundaries. Users can edit, add, or remove selected rows from the table. Range Address and Range Mask fields define subnet of NEs. The Area ID dropdown list displays area IDs already defined.

LAN Emulation Interworking: Toggles built-in LAN emulation interworking functions. When enabled, this prevents packet duplication from flooding domain with multiple gateways (dynamic routing "islands"). When performing OSPF over LAN Emulation interface, the EMS-BGF performs multicast address translation to allow elements in flooding domain. Management Address and Management Mask must match the IP address of Management Station that is defined as subnet.

2. Set the state of OSPF by selecting the Enable or Disable radio button in the OSPF Enable area.

3. Set the state of ASBR by selecting the Enable or Disable radio button in the ASBR Enable area. If it is enabled, OSPF advertises its static routes.

4. In the OSPF Area ID area, click + to add a valid ID to the table. The system downloads the configuration to the NE after performing a validation check to confirm that the new entry is unique.

5. In the OSPF Area Range Table area, click + to add an area range to the table.

6. In the LAN Emulation Interworking area, if the LAN Emulation Interworking checkbox is selected, set the Management Address and Management Mask in the corresponding fields.

7. Click Apply to save your settings.

Page 55: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing NEs

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-13

Network Interfaces In the Network Interfaces tab window, user can create, modify, or delete network interfaces. For one NE, a maximum of 12 IP network interfaces can be created.

To manage network interfaces:

1. In a BG-30 or BG-64 NE shelf view window, select the NE in the left object tree, then select Configuration > IP Networking in the menu. Select the Network Interfaces tab in the opened window.

The Dcc0 network interface is created by default. It cannot be deleted from the list, but it can be edited.

Page 56: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing NEs LCT-BGF User Manual

5-14 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

2. To create a new network interface, click in the toolbar. The Create New Network Interface window opens.

In the Network Interface Attributes area, the following attributes can be configured:

Encapsulation: Encapsulation type. The value can be LAN or PPP, according to the selection in Network Interface drop-down list at the top of the window.

Numbering: can be set as Unnumbered or Numbered: Unnumbered: no IP address is assigned. Numbered: explicit IP address assigned to interface.

IP Address: IP Address of interface. Mask: Mask for IP Address.

Page 57: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing NEs

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-15

In the OSPF Interface Attributes area, the main attributes that can be configured are described as follows:

OSPF Enable: the OSPF state can be set as enable or disable. The default is disabled.

Passive: the OSPF can be set as passive or active. Passive: Relevant for OSPF enabled interfaces. OSPF protocol is

not performed over interface, but OSPF advertises hosts on interface subnet. Area ID and Metric attribute must be defined.

Active: Active operational status. Area ID: Relevant only when OSPF is enabled. Dropdown list allows

selection of area from one of four areas defined in Overall OSPF tab.

3. To edit a network interface, select the interface you want to edit and click in the toolbar.

4. To delete a network interface, select the interface you want to delete can click in the toolbar.

Page 58: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing NEs LCT-BGF User Manual

5-16 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

OSPF Interfaces The parameters of the OSPF interfaces can only be viewed. You cannot delete OSPF interfaces from the OSPF interfaces table. The OSPF interface is an extension of the network interface. There is always an OSPF interface entry (enabled or disabled) for each network interface. When you delete network interfaces in the Network interfaces table, OSPF interfaces are automatically deleted (except for the dcc0 OSPF interface object, which is never deleted).

To view the OSPF interfaces:

1. In a BG-30 NE shelf view window, select the NE in the left object tree, then select Configuration > OSPF Configuration in the menu. Select the OSPF Interfaces tab in the opened window.

2. Click in the toolbar to retrieve information of the OSPF interfaces to view.

Page 59: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing NEs

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-17

DCC Terminations Terminate DCC refers to the XC which is created between the COM_DCC and the R_DCC, M_DCC or Clear Channel of the optical ports. This section describes how to configure the terminate DCC.

To configure the terminate DCC channels:

1. In a BG-30 NE shelf view window, select the NE in the left object tree, then select Configuration > OSPF Configuration in the menu. Select the DCC Terminations tab in the opened window.

2. From this window, you can set network interfaces to COM objects by

selecting the interfaces from the dropdown lists.

3. Click Apply to save your settings.

Page 60: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing NEs LCT-BGF User Manual

5-18 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Virtual Link In the Virtual Link tab window, user can create, modify, or delete virtual links. For one NE, a maximum of 8 virtual links can be created.

To manage virtual links:

1. In a BG-30 or BG-64 NE shelf view window, select the NE in the left object tree, then select Configuration > IP Networking in the menu. Select the Virtual Link tab in the opened window.

Page 61: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing NEs

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-19

2. To create a new virtual link, click in the toolbar. The Create Virtual Link window opens.

In the Virtual Link Attributes area, the following attributes can be configured: Neighbour IP and Transit Area.

In the OSPF Interface Attributes area, the main attributes that can be configured are described as follows:

OSPF Enable: the OSPF state can be set as enable or disable. The default is disabled.

Passive: the OSPF can be set as passive or active. Passive: Relevant for OSPF enabled interfaces. OSPF protocol is

not performed over interface, but OSPF advertises hosts on interface subnet. Area ID and Metric attribute must be defined.

Active: Active operational status. Area ID: Relevant only when OSPF is enabled. Dropdown list allows

selection of area from one of four areas defined in Overall OSPF tab.

3. To edit a virtual link, select the interface you want to edit and click in the toolbar.

4. To delete a virtual link, select the interface you want to delete can click in the toolbar.

Page 62: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing NEs LCT-BGF User Manual

5-20 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Setting the NE Time The start time in NE devices is not necessarily the actual time. The NE time must be set so that it is consistent with the actual time after the NE starts to run. Each NE has its own clock (that reflects the NE time). The generation time for both alarms and events is determined by the NE time. The real time of the PC refers to the current time of the LCT-BGF PC. The NE time and the LCT-BGF PC time should be synchronized.

To set the NE time:

1. In the NE shelf view window, select Configuration > NE Time Setting in the main menu. The NE Time Setting window opens.

2. Click System Time to directly read the system time of the PC, or manually

enter the time.

3. Click Get NE Time to get the NE's time.

4. Click Apply to set the time. A confirmation message is displayed.

Page 63: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing NEs

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-21

Configuring Communication Parameters

The powerful network management function of SDH needs strong support from the ECC stack. As a managed object itself, the ECC stack should be manageable. ECC stack management information enables you to receive prewarning signals in sufficient time before an NE is disconnected due to DCC hardware channel performance deterioration, and to locate the problem for a specific NE after disconnection. It also provides some necessary network test measures. Every NE must be set with some communication parameters, such as gateway attributes, the Ethernet port’s IP address, the DCC port’s IP address, and the LCT-BGF computer’s IP address.

A gateway NE is an NE directly connected with the LCT-BGF. In terms of the physical channel, information exchange between the gateway NE and the LCT-BGF does not pass the DCC channel and needs no forwarding via any other NE. A nongateway NE is an NE that communicates with the LCT-BGF via a gateway NE. Generally, it is connected with the gateway via an optical channel for data transmission over the DCC channel.

DCC transparent transmission means that the DCC code stream passes the NE transparently, meaning it is transmitted transparently from the STM-n Rx end of the NE to another STM-n Tx end. In this context, transparent refers to protocol independence and the physical connection rate is purely N x 64 Kbps. In contrast, termination means local generation of DCC code streams at the STM-n Tx end.

There are two possibilities for termination:

Access permitted: accesses the DCC code stream to the protocol processor for processing

Access prohibited: does not process the DCC code stream at all

Page 64: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing NEs LCT-BGF User Manual

5-22 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Configuring Communication Parameters This section describes how to configure communication parameters.

To configure communication parameters:

1. In the NE shelf view window, select the NE in the left object tree, then select Configuration > NE Connection Settings in the shelf menu. The NE Communication window opens.

Page 65: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing NEs

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-23

2. Use this window to set gateway attributes, the Ethernet port IP address, and the MCUE Ethernet port IP. If Gateway is selected in the Connection Model field, both local and remote NEs can be managed through the LCT-BGF.

3. Click Apply to save your settings.

Page 66: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing NEs LCT-BGF User Manual

5-24 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Managing DCC and Overhead for BG-40 The DCC setting enables you to perform the following configuration for the BG-40 NE:

VC12 to SM10 V3.5 Work Mode DCC Swap Attribute DCC Access

To manage DCC settings for BG-40:

1. In a BG-40 NE shelf view window, select Control and Physical Object > MXC4X in the left object tree. Then select the DCC Settings tab under the Configuration working mode.

2. In the VC12 to SM10 area, set the attributes as below:

To set a VC-12-12 link to the SM10, you must check whether the MXC4X V.35 is in Traffic Path mode. If it is, such a link is prohibited.

To set a VC-12-10 or VC-12-11 link, first check whether it has been configured with any overhead. If it has, such a link is prohibited.

3. In the V3.5 Work Mode area, the following conditions apply when configuring the V.35 interface:

VC-12-12 can only work in Traffic Path mode when it is not connected to the SM10.

If V.35 has been configured with DCC or DCC access control, its working mode cannot be modified and can only be DCC Mode.

Traffic can be set only when the working mode is Traffic Path. The DCC Type can be set as RDCC or MDCC only when DCC Mode

is selected.

Page 67: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing NEs

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-25

4. In the DCC Swap Attribute area, the optical port SWAP setting only restricts its MS property. After a SWAP occurs, the optical port’s MS can only be cross connected with an RS (an alien RS or its own RS). In addition, there is no restriction to the RS that supports transparent transmission. Operation objects include the optical ports under all subcards of the selected NE.

5. In the DCC Access area, two DCC access control modes are supported: six RDCCs (default) and three RDCCs plus one MDCC.

The following conditions apply when configuring DCC access:

The accessed RDCC or MDCC can be selected from six SOHs, two EOCs, and V.35.

V.35 can be selected for DCC access only when it works in Extended DCC mode.

The DCC type (RDCC or MDCC) depends on the V.35 mode setting. No transparently transmitted RDCC or MDCC can be accessed. MDCC access used in SWAP is prohibited, but RDCC access of the

SWAP incoming MDCC is allowed.

Details about creating DCC XC, refer to Creating DCC XC (on page 9-10).

Page 68: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing NEs LCT-BGF User Manual

5-26 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

To perform DCC Overhead configuration for BG-40:

1. In the BG-40 NE shelf view window, select the NE in the left object tree. Then select the OH XC List tab under the Services working mode.

2. Click in the toolbar. The Create OH XC window opens, as shown in the following figure.

Page 69: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing NEs

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-27

3. From this window, the following conditions apply for DCC overhead configuration:

Only the following DS-0 timeslots can be cross connected: F1, U1, V.24, and V.11 (when V.35 works in the V.11 mode).

VC-12-10 and VC-12-11 cannot be used for overhead configuration when they are connected with the SM10.

V.11 can be used for overhead configuration only when V.35 uses V.11 Overhead Interface mode.

No cross connection is allowed between two V.24 channels and one V.11 channel. Cross connection is permitted in all other cases.

The details about creating OH XC, refer to Creating OH XC (on page 9-8).

Managing DCC and Overhead for the BG-20, BG-30 and BG-64

DCC and overhead configuration for the BG-20, BG-30 and BG-64 use the same concepts as a cross-connect. As such, you create cross connections between RS-DCC/MS-DCC/SWAP MS-DCC/Clear Channel and HDLC.

The following figure shows the DCC cross-connect model for the BG-20, BG-30 and BG-64.

Page 70: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing NEs LCT-BGF User Manual

5-28 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

The following describes the types of DCC cross connections as shown in figure:

1 R-DCC termination: connects between an STM-N R-DCC and a QMC R-DCC

2 M-DCC termination: connects between an STM-N M-DCC and a QMC M-DCC

3 R-DCC transparent: connects between an R-DCC of one STM-N and an R-DCC of another STM-N

4 M-DCC transparent: connects between an M-DCC of one STM-N and an M-DCC of another STM-N

5 Channelized MS_DCC termination (Terminal Mode): connects between an STM-N MDCC_3B and a QMC DCC-R

6 Channelized MS_DCC transparent (Through Mode): connects between an STM-N R-DCC (X) and another STM-N M-DCC_3B (Y)

7 Framed Clear Channel termination (RDCC): connects between a framed clear channel RDCC and a QMC RDCC

8 Unframed Clear Channel termination: the entire 2 M is an HDLC that connects to SCC4

9 Framed Clear Channel termination (MDCC): connects between a framed clear channel MDCC and a QMC MDCC

10 COM-DCCx-1termination: general RDCC

The following cross-connect limitations apply:

A DCC cross connection is bidirectional.

Unidirectional and broadcast are not supported. A loopback requires JIG support.

A DCC cross connection is between the source/sink with the same byte: RDCC to RDCC MDCC to MDCC MDCC_3B to RDCC Framed clear channel RDCC to QMC-RDCC

The EMS-BGF and LCT-BGF do not support connections between COM-DCC. JIG does support such connections.

COM-DCCx can be terminated with any DCC, including RDCC, MDCC, and unframed E1 clear channel.

An unframed clear channel can only connect with COM-DCCx.

When a clear channel is configured with a DCC cross connection, the clear channel’s properties cannot be changed.

Page 71: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing NEs

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-29

To manage DCC XC for BG-20, BG-30 and BG-64:

1. In a BG-20/BG-30/BG-64 NE shelf view window, select the NE in the left object tree. Then select the DCC XC List tab under the Services working mode.

2. Click in the toolbar. The DCC XC window opens, as shown in the following figure.

Page 72: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing NEs LCT-BGF User Manual

5-30 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

3. Select the DCC XC source timeslot in the Start Timeslot tree and the sink timeslot in the End Timeslot tree.

4. Click Save to add the DCC XC list.

5. Click Activate to activate the DCC XC.

To manage Overhead XC for BG-20, BG-30 and BG-64:

1. In a BG-20/BG-30/BG-64 NE shelf view window, select the NE in the left object tree. Then select the OH XC List tab under the Services working mode.

Page 73: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing NEs

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-31

2. Click in the toolbar. The OH XC window opens, as shown in the following figure.

3. Select the OH XC source timeslot in the Start Timeslot tree and the sink

timeslot in the End Timeslot tree.

4. Click Save to add the OH XC list.

5. Click Activate to activate the OH XC.

Page 74: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing NEs LCT-BGF User Manual

5-32 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Configuring NE Attributes You can configure NE attributes in the NE Settings window.

To configure NE attributes:

1. Right-click an NE, and select Configuration in the right menu. In the opened window, select the NE Settings tab.

2. Set the NE attributes in the window. The read-only attributes without

editing areas cannot be changed.

3. After entering the information, click Apply to send the information to the NE.

4. Click to refresh the information in the window.

Page 75: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing NEs

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-33

Setting the Card Maximum Traffic for the BG-40

Card maximum traffic setup specifies the maximum number of VC-12s that can be assigned during the cross connection for BG-40 NEs. This attribute must be set on the following cards: OMD1 (0~63), PE1_16 (0~16), PE1_32 (0~32), FE_L12, and ESW_2G_8F. After slots are assigned on one of these cards, you set the card’s maximum traffic. You can also select one or all cards to set the maximum traffic for various cards on an NE.

Card maximum traffic setup is not required for BG-20 or BG-30 NEs.

To set the maximum traffic for a card:

1. In the BG-40 NE shelf view window, select the NE in the left object tree, then select the Configuration working mode.

This window displays the list of cards for this NE for which the maximum traffic must be set. This list contains the following information:

Card: card name. Max Traffic: maximum traffic value. Traffic Range: permitted setting range. If the card is configured with

any timeslot, the permitted setting range is the maximum serial number of the configured timeslot and the maximum value of the card. If E1ML uses the eighth VC-12 as the maximum timeslot when being configured with a cross connection, the maximum traffic range can be 8 through 21.

The Ethernet Card button is used to configure the maximum traffic for FE_L12 and ESW_2G_8F Ethernet cards.

Page 76: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing NEs LCT-BGF User Manual

5-34 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

2. Click to retrieve the information to view.

3. Click Apply and wait for a confirmation that the operation completed successfully.

4. Click Close to exit the window.

Resetting NEs When an NE physical device does not work normally and needs to be initialized, an NE reset function is used. The NE reset operation resets all the cards except the MCU.

Both warm and cold resets are available. A warm reset resets only the main processing unit of the card, meaning it resets the application program that is running. A warm reset has no influence on the service. A cold reset resets not only the main processing unit, but also the peripheral chips. A cold reset influences services on the card.

To reset an NE:

1. In the NE shelf view window, select Maintenance > Reset in the main menu.

2. Select the Warm Reset or Cold Reset radio button.

3. Click OK. A confirmation window opens prompting you to confirm resetting.

4. Click Yes to confirm.

Page 77: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing NEs

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-35

NE Data Backup This section describes the NE data backup procedure, which simplifies network management and maintenance tasks.

To backup NE DB File:

1. In the NE shelf view window, select Maintenance > NE DB > Backup in the main menu. If you do not select one, the Backup NE DB File window displays a list with all the NEs in the topology.

2. Click Set Backup File Path to select a folder to save the file.

3. In the Max Thread area, select the number of max threads.

4. Click Start to activate the NE data backup program.

5. Click Stop to stop the program.

Page 78: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing NEs LCT-BGF User Manual

5-36 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

To restore the NE data backup:

1. Select the NEs whose you want to restore, and select Maintenance > NE DB > Restore in the main menu. If you do not select one, the Restore NE DB File window displays a list with all the NEs in the topology.

2. Click the button in File Name list to select a folder where the file is.

3. In the Max Thread area, select the number of max threads.

4. Click Start to activate the NE data backup program.

5. Click Stop to stop the program.

Page 79: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 6-1

In this chapter: Overview .......................................................................................................... 6-1Configuring the Synchronous Timing Table ................................................... 6-2Configuring PCM Timing ................................................................................ 6-4

Overview Synchronous timing configuration enables an NE to automatically select and be synchronized with the highest-quality clock source in the network. This achieves clock synchronization for the entire network.

The following operations can be performed:

Configuring synchronous timing

Obtaining the clock working mode

Calibrating the clock card frequency

Calibrating the active/standby switching of the clock card

These operations can be performed at the system operator level.

The NE synchronous timing table window lists all the clocks for external references that can be selected. You manually select options and set priorities for them to form a synchronous clock table, and then send it to the equipment.

After setting the synchronous timing table, determine whether the equipment is correctly locked with the expected clock source by viewing the clock working mode. In addition, you can view the current clock working mode and clock reference of the NE in the NE shelf view's Timing Settings window.

6 Configuring Timing Source

Page 80: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring Timing Source LCT-BGF User Manual

6-2 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Configuring the Synchronous Timing Table

The handling of synchronous timing for SDH equipment utilizes a Synchronous Timing table. The NE Synchronous Timing table enables you to determine the selection range of NE references and customize the attributes of each external reference. The Synchronous Timing table specifies the quality level and availability status of the external references.

Each NE has a Synchronous Timing table that collects all the optional clock references and various attributes for the NE’s current configuration. The NE equipment can select the reference with the optimum quality in this table as its synchronous timing source.

Each clock reference has multiple reference attributes, including the reference ID, physical location, clock frequency, synchronous status S1 type value, S1 user-defined attributes, priority, availability status, and application status. Using these attributes, you can identify a reference, specify its quality level, monitor its availability status, and control its application.

This section describes how to configure synchronous timing for NEs in the LCT-BGF.

To configure synchronous timing for the BG-40:

1. In the BG-40 NE shelf view, select Control and Physical Object > MXC4X in the left object tree and then select the Timing Settings tab under Configuration working mode.

Page 81: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring Timing Source

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 6-3

2. Select the corresponding external references for the clock. Click Apply to send the external clock references to the NE.

3. Click to retrieve the information to view.

4. Click to copy the settings from this NE to other NEs.

To configure synchronous timing for the BG-20/BG-20C/BG-30/BG-64:

1. In the BG-20/BG-30/BG-64 NE shelf view,, select Control and Physical Object > TMU in the left object tree and select the Timing Settings tab under Configuration working mode.

2. For each timing priority, select the corresponding external references for the

clock. Click Apply to send the external clock references to the NE.

Page 82: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring Timing Source LCT-BGF User Manual

6-4 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Configuring PCM Timing Synchronous timing configuration of a PCM card enables the card to automatically select and be synchronized with the highest-quality clock source in the network. This achieves clock synchronization for the entire network.

To configure SM10 timing:

1. In the BG-40 NE shelf view, select SM10 in the left object tree and select the Timing Settings tab in the properties area.

2. Click to retrieve the timing configuration from the equipment.

3. Set the timing parameters and click Apply to send the configuration to the database and the equipment.

Page 83: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring Timing Source

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 6-5

To configure SM_10E timing:

1. In the BG-20 NE shelf view, click SM_10E > TMU in the left object tree and select the Timing Settings tab in the properties area.

2. Click to retrieve the timing configuration from the equipment.

3. Set the timing parameters and click Apply to send the configuration to the database and the equipment.

Page 84: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring Timing Source LCT-BGF User Manual

6-6 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Page 85: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-1

In this chapter: Overview .......................................................................................................... 7-1Workflow ......................................................................................................... 7-1Working with Cards ......................................................................................... 7-2Managing the BG_OW .................................................................................. 7-16PDH Cards ..................................................................................................... 7-19SDH Cards ..................................................................................................... 7-22Data Cards ..................................................................................................... 7-30PCM Cards ................................................................................................... 7-136Control Cards ............................................................................................... 7-142Power Units ................................................................................................. 7-147Fan Control Units ........................................................................................ 7-148

Overview This section discusses how to use the LCT-BGF to configure and manage cards.

Workflow You can configure and manage the following types of cards in the LCT-BGF:

SDH cards: includes E1, E3 and STM-1/STM-4 cards. Optical cards: includes SAMQ, SMQ1_4, SMS4, OMD1, S1_4 cards. XIO cards: includes XIO30-1/4/16 and XIO30Q_1&4 cards. Data cards: includes Layer 1, Layer 2, MPLS and EOP cards. PCM cards: includes SM10 and SM_10E cards.

7 Configuring and Managing

Cards

Page 86: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-2 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Working with Cards

Configuring Card Attributes Card attributes depend on the configuration requirements for each card. In the Card Attributes Setup window, you can configure overhead parameters, loopback attributes, and special card attributes.

To configure card attributes:

1. In the NE shelf view window, select a card in the left object tree and select the Configuration working mode. The descriptive information for each card is displayed in the General tab.

Page 87: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-3

2. To configure the overhead parameters, select the TTI and TSL tab in the properties area.

3. To configure the attribute for a single VC-4/VC-12, select the VC-4/VC-12

in the tree, and then select the Configuration working mode.

To view the overhead information of a single VC-4/VC-12, select the VCs tab from the above window.

Page 88: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-4 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

4. Click Apply to save your settings.

5. Click to retrieve the information.

Card Layout Description This section describes the layout of the cards.

BG-40 The BG-40 is a compact STM-1/STM-4-compatible multiservice transmission system offering powerful expansion capabilities. Within its 2 U (88 mm) height, it can provide a maximum of either 88 E1 services, 10 E3/DS-3 services, or 36 10BaseT/100BaseT Ethernet services. It also supports six 155 Mbps optical or electrical interfaces, or two 622 Mbps optical interfaces and two 155 Mbps optical or electrical interfaces simultaneously. According to networking needs, it can be flexibly configured as TM, ADM, or multi-ADM. In addition, it supports a variety of complete and flexible network-level protection.

The BG-40 supports two power supply modes: -48 VDC and 220 VAC. In combination with its multiservice access capability, small size, and low cost, it can be deployed widely in various carrier MAN access layers and private communication networks.

The BG-40 card layout diagram is shown in the following figure.

The following designations apply in this diagram:

MS designates the main slot.

ES1 and ES2 are extension slots.

PS is the power module slot.

DS1, DS2, and DS3 are the three service daughterboard slots on the main board.

DS-OW is the orderwire daughterboard slot on the main board.

In the BG-40, the card applicable to each slot is shown in the following table.

Page 89: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-5

Module Description MS DS1 DS2 DS3 DS-OW

ES1 ES2 PS

MXC4X Cross connect, timing, and control card

OMD1 2_STM-1 optical or electrical module

√ √ √

OMS4 1_STM-4 module

√ √ √

MET_L1 4_10/100BaseT module

OW_4X Orderwire module

M345_2 3_E3/DS-3 module

√ √ √

ME1_8F 8_E1 module √ √ √

PE1_32 32_E1 card √ √

PE1_16 16_E1 card √ √

P345_3 3_E3/DS3 card √ √

FE_L12 Ethernet card with L2 switch (16_10/ 100BaseT)

√ √

ESW_2G_8F L1/2 Ethernet card with 2xGbE and 8x10/100BaseT interfaces

√ √

SM10 Intelligent PCM card (26-channel N_64 Kbps) Note: Only one card can be installed in a BG-40 shelf

√ √

INF_40X Power Filter Unit (-48 VDC)

AC_CONV-40X

Power Conversion Unit (220 VAC)

Page 90: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-6 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

BG-20 The BG-20 is a compact STM-1/STM-4-compatible multiservice transmission system offering powerful expansion capabilities. It is a multipurpose SDH network element that supports ring, chain, and mesh network topologies.

The BG-20 card layout diagram is shown in the following figure.

The following designations apply in this diagram:

ESlots (ES1/ES2/ES3) are extension slots.

BASE designates the main slot.

FCU indicates the fan slot.

INF is the power module slot.

DSlot is the service daughterboard slot on the main board.

In the BG-20, the card applicable to each slot is shown in the following table. Module BG-20B BG-20E

BASE INF/AC_CONV

DSlot OW L1/L2 ES1 ES2 ES3 PSlot

MXC20_L1 √

MXC20_L2 √

OW √

INF_20B √ √

AC_CONV_20E

√ √

L1B_6F √

MESW_6F √

MPS_6F √

M345_3 √

SMD1 √

SMD1H √

OMS4B √

Page 91: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-7

Module BG-20B BG-20E

BASE INF/AC_CONV

DSlot OW L1/L2 ES1 ES2 ES3 PSlot

OMS4H √

MEOP_4 √

MEOP_4H √

MGE_1_L1 √

ME1_21 √

ME1_21H √

ME1_42 √

ME1_42H √

ME_2G_4F √

ESW_2G_8F_E √ √ √

MPS_2G_8F √ √ √

PE1_63 √ √ √

P345_3E √ √ √

SM10E √ √ √

S1_4 √ √ √

BG-20C

The BG-20C is a new, very low cost and miniature MSPP product. The Hardware architecture is based on BG-20B_L2M, but without any extensibility.

The BG-20C provides a very low cost, miniature and MPLS capable demarcation platform. It is small STM-1/4 TM/ADM equipment with fixed E1 and FE interfaces. To meet the tough TTM, BG-20C is designed based on BG-20B_L2M platform by removing unnecessary functions & interfaces and merging everything to a single board.

BG-30 The BG-30 is a miniature, low-cost, flexible, redundant ADM1/4/16 MSPP for access networks, offered as part of the overall Network Solutions Division solution. It supports interoperability with the XDM and the BG-40/BG-20 in all aspects, including SDH, PDH, Data, DCC, management, and other net-wide functions.

The BG-30 can interface both SDH and data functions at a very low cost, very small size, and with a wide operating temperature and humidity range. It can be mounted on street cabinets, indoors, and on walls.

Page 92: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-8 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

The BG-30 includes two units – the BG-30B (base unit) and the BG-30E (expansion unit). The BG-30B offers a lower entry cost, while the BG-30E enables higher expandability. All expansion cards for the BG-20E can be reused in the BG-30E.

The BG-30 card layout diagram is shown in the following figure.

The following designations apply in this diagram:

PSA, PSB: power supply module slots for the BG-30B and BG-30E

XSA, XSB: XIO module slots for the BG-30B

MS: MCP module slot for the BG-30B

TS 1#, 2#, 3#: tributary module slots for the BG-30B

FS: FCU module slot for the BG-30B and the BG-30E

ES 1#, 2#, 3#: expansion card slots for the BG-30E

The following table provides a description of each BG-30 card and its applicable slot in the shelf. Module Description Applicable slot

INF-30B Single input DC power supply module, with input filtering and Fan Power supply

PSA, PSB

INF-30E Single input DC power supply module, with input filtering and Fan Power supply

PSA, PSB

AC_CONV-30B Single input AC power supply card, with AC to -48V converter and Fan Power supply

PSA (will also occupy PSB space)

AC_CONV-30E Single input AC power supply card, with AC to -48V converter and Fan Power supply

PSA (will also occupy PSB space)

FCU-30B Fan Control units with Fans for BG-30B shelf, also includes the connector for T3/T4 interfaces

FS

FCU-30E Fan Control units with Fans for BG-30E shelf

FS

Page 93: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-9

Module Description Applicable slot

MCP30 A card with the units main CPU, providing main control, communication and overhead processing functions, and various management and housekeeping interfaces

MS

XIO30-1 A card with one STM1o/e aggregate interface, SDH XC and timing unit

XSA, XSB

XIO30-4 A card with one STM1/STM4 compatible aggregate interface, SDH XC and timing unit

XSA, XSB

XIO30Q_1&4 A card with 4 STM1/4 aggregate interfaces, SDH XC and timing unit

XSA, XSB

XIO30-16 A card with one STM16 aggregate interface, SDH XC and timing unit

XSA, XSB

PME1_21 21 x E1 (balanced only) tributary card TS1#, TS2#, TS3# PM345_3 3 x E3/DS3 tributary. Each interface can

be configured to E3 or DS3 independently

TS1#, TS2#, TS3#

DMFE_4_L1 L1 card with 4 x 10/100Base-T interfaces and 4 EoP WANs

TS1#, TS2#, TS3#

DMFE_4_L2 L2 card with 4 x 10/100Base-T interfaces and 8 EoS WANs

TS1#, TS2#, TS3#

DMFX_4_L1 L1 card with 4 x 10/100Base-FX interfaces and 4 EoS WANs

TS1#, TS2#, TS3#

DMFX_4_L2 L2 card with 4 x 10/100Base-FX interfaces and 8 EoS WANs

TS1#, TS2#, TS3#

DMEOP_4 AC/DC power converter and FAN power supply unit for BG-20B

TS1#, TS2#, TS3#

DMGE_1_L1 L1 card with 1 x GbE interfaces TS1#, TS2#, TS3# DMGE_4_L1 L1 card with 4 x GbE interfaces TS1#, TS2#, TS3# DMGE_2_L2 L2 card with 2 x GbE interfaces TS1#, TS2#, TS3# SMD1B 2 x STM-1 interfaces card, each SFP can

be electrical or optical TS1#, TS2#, TS3#

SMS4 1 x STM-4 interfaces card TS1#, TS2#, TS3# SMD4 2 x STM-4 interfaces card TS2#, TS3# SMQ1&4 4 x STM-1/4 interfaces card TS1#, TS2#, TS3# SMS16 Single STM-16 IO card TS1#, TS2#, TS3# PE1_63 63 x E1 (balanced only) expansion card ES1#, ES2#, ES3# P345_3 3 x E3/DS3 tributary. Each interface can

be configured to E3 or DS3 independently

ES1#, ES2#, ES3#

Page 94: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-10 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Module Description Applicable slot

S1_4 4 x STM-1 interfaces card, each SFP can be electrical or optical

ES1#, ES2#, ES3#

S4_1 1 x STM-4 interfaces card ES1#, ES2#, ES3# ESW_2G_8F_E L2 data expansion card with 2 x GBE

and 8 x 10/100Base-T interfaces and 16 EoS WANs

ES1#, ES2#, ES3#

MPS_2G_8F L2 data expansion card with 2 x GBE and 8 x 10/100Base-T interfaces and at least 16 EoS WANs, both provider bridge and MPLS are supported.

ES1#, ES2#, ES3#

SM_10E PCM expansion card withDXC1/0 and up to 24 channels of varies types of Nx64k interfaces

ES1#, ES2#, ES3#

TP21_2 TP card for 21_E1 interfaces in 1:2 protection mode.

ES1#, ES2#, ES3#

TPS1_1 TP card for 4_STM1 or 3_E3/DS3 cards in 1:1 protection mode.

ES1#, ES2#, ES3#

TP63_1 TP card for 63_E1 interfaces in 1:1 protection scheme.

ES3#

BG-64 BG-64 is a low cost, miniature, redundant ADM-64 Multiple Service Transport Platform (MSTP) for NGN (MSAN), Cellular hub migration, Ethernet aggregation and TDM.

The BG-64 card layout diagram is shown in the following figure.

The following designations apply in this diagram:

INF-64: DC power supply and input filter, redundant

FCU-64: Fan unit for BG-64

MCP64: main control card for BG-64

XIO64: XFP based STM-64 interface, timing unit, cross-connect matrix, support redundancy

TS 1#~7#: tributary module slots for BG-64. The slot dimension is the same as BG-30B Tslot.

Page 95: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-11

The following table provides a description of each BG-64 card and its applicable slot in the shelf.

Module PS A PS B FS MS XSA XSB Tslot1 Tslot2 Tslot3 Tslot4 Tslot5 Tslot6 Tslot7 ES1 ES2 ES3

INF-64 √ √

FCU_64 √

MCP64 √

XIO64 √ √

PME1_21 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

PM345_3 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

SMQ1&4 √ V √ √ √ √ √

SMS16 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

DMFE_4_L1 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

DMFX_4_L1 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

DMFE_4_L2 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

DMFX_4_L2 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

DMGE_4_L1 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

DMGE_2_L2 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

PE1_63 √ √ √

P345_3E √ √ √

S1_4 √ √ √

Page 96: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-12 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Hot Insertion Hot insertion enables you to insert cards on the equipment without powering off. To increase system availability, hot insertion is used to reduce down time and facilitate system upgrades.

The LCT-BGF can assign ME1_42H, ME1_21H, SMD1H, OMS4H, and MGE_1_L1 cards in the BG-20 NE:

The following cards, modules, and functionality support hot insertion:

ME1_42H: 42 x E1 module for a Dslot that supports hot insertion. The card supports full interchangeability with the current ME1_42, but has a different card type.

ME1_21H: 21 x E1 module for a Dslot that supports hot insertion. The card supports full interchangeability with the current ME1_21, but has a different card type.

SMD1H: 2 x STM-1 module for a Dslot that supports hot insertion. The card supports full interchangeability with the current SMD1, but has a different card type.

OMS4H: single STM-4 module for a Dslot that supports hot insertion. The card supports full interchangeability with the current OMS4B, but has a different card type.

MEOP_4H: 4 x FE EOP module for a Dslot that supports hot insertion. The card supports full interchangeability with the current MEOP_4, but has a different card type.

MGE_1_L1: Single GbE module with layer 1 functionality.

Page 97: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-13

Slot Reassignment Reassigning a card means assigning a higher-capacity card of the same card type to a slot that already has a slot assignment. This may be a traffic-affecting operation, and the operation can be performed even if the original card is carrying live traffic.

Reassignment features are as follows:

Reassignment deletes the current logical card and assigns the new logical card.

Unlike the Delete operation, reassignment allows the traffic existing on the old card to be kept and moved to the new card smoothly.

To support reassignment, the cross connection and related properties of the old card should be mapped to the new card.

Reassignment moves the existing cross connection and properties to the new card automatically.

Reassignment is an operation for a logical card (not a physical card).

Reassignment has strict requirements regarding the order in which you perform the required operations. You must first change the physical card and then reassign the required logical card. Reassignment will fail if the physical card is not changed to the required card.

The BG-30 supports reassignment for XIO30-1/XIO30-4/XIO30-16 cards.

Page 98: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-14 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Reassignment Procedure The following figure illustrates the BG-30 reassignment procedure.

As illustrated in the preceding figure, the Expected Card is the logical card and the Actual Card is the physical card.

Several reassignment status issues exist in the system. These are:

1. Initial status (traffic is normal on the old card).

2. Card is reassigned, but not replaced (not permitted).

3. Card is reassigned and replaced (traffic is normal on the new card).

4. Card is replaced, but not reassigned (compatible; traffic OK).

The proper reassignment procedure is 1 → 4 → 3:

1. Check the initial status. The traffic should be normal.

2. Replace the physical card.

3. Perform the reassignment.

Page 99: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-15

Setting the Laser On/Off Status This operation controls the on/off status of each laser. An automatic shutdown function can be used to shut down the laser when a received loss of signal (LOS) is detected.

To set the laser on/off status:

1. In the NE shelf view window, select an optical interface in the left object tree, and then select the Maintenance working mode. The window opens as shown below.

2. Click to obtain the laser on/off attribute of this optical interface from the NE.

3. Set the laser attribute value, as required.

4. Click Apply to send the attribute value to an NE, and save it to the database.

Page 100: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-16 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Managing the BG_OW The external orderwire (OW) box provides orderwire functionality using 64 Kbps voice communication channels between NEs. These channels are used for interfacing with the BG-20B, conference processing, CODECs, DTMF detection, signal processing, four-wire interfaces to the handset, and so on.

Slot Assignment for OW This section describes the procedure for assigning the OW card.

To assign the OW card:

1. Select an NE in the EMS topology map, and then select Configuration > Slot Assignment in the main menu. The Slot Assignment window opens.

2. Right-click on the OW slot and select Add > OW in the pop-up menu.

3. Click Apply to send the configuration to the NE and the database.

Page 101: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-17

Configuring OW Settings Orderwire attribute configuration configures the orderwire telephone, orderwire attributes, and orderwire routing of all NEs. Orderwire telephone configuration relates to the entire network and can only be performed on NEs in the management domain. Operation authorities are needed from all NEs in the network to perform orderwire configuration in the network.

The orderwire telephone is used for orderwire contacts between SDH NEs that support the addressing call and conference calls. The orderwire number is a three-digit integer number.

SDH orderwire provides communication for field engineers and equipment maintenance personnel, and supports address selective calls and conference calls.

To configure BG-40 orderwire settings:

1. In the BG-40 NE shelf view window, select Control and Physical Object > OW in the left object tree. Then select the OW Settings tab under the Configuration working mode.

Page 102: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-18 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

2. Configure the settings in the window. The parameters are describes as below:

Phone Number 1 /Phone Number 2: the orderwire number of the end NE.

Conference Call Attribute: refers to the NE conference telephone when it is used in conversation. There are two options: Listen and Talk and Listen Only.

Conference Call Number: refers to the conference telephone number for all NEs that support conference calling.

Conference waiting time: applies to the entire network. The unit is seconds.

3. Click Apply to deliver the orderwire attributes of the NE to the NE equipment and save them to the database.

4. Click to display the NE orderwire attributes obtained from the NE equipment.

To configure BG-20/BG-30 orderwire settings: 1. In the BG-20/BG-30 NE shelf view window, select Control and Physical

Object > OW in the left object tree. Then select the OW Settings tab under the Configuration working mode.

2. Configure the settings in the window. 3. Click Apply to deliver the orderwire attributes of the NE to the NE

equipment and save them to the database.

4. Click to display the NE orderwire attributes obtained from the NE equipment.

Page 103: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-19

PDH Cards PDH cards include E1 and E3 cards, as described in this section.

E1 Cards Following lists the E1 cards:

ME1_8F: 8_E1 card for BG-40.

ME1_8: 8_E1 card for BG-40 (fixed).

PE1_16: 16_E1 card for BG-40.

PE1_32: 32_E1 card for BG-40.

EME1_21: 21_E1 interfaces with mappers and LIU functionality for BG-20.

ME1_21: 21_E1 card for BG-20.

ME1_21H: 21_E1 card supporting hot-swapping for BG-20.

ME1_42: 42_E1 card for BG-20.

ME1_42H: 42_E1 card supporting hot-swapping for BG-20.

PME1_21: 21_E1 card for BG-30B and BG-64.

PE1_63: 63_E1 card for BG-20 and BG-30.

You can perform overhead attribute and E1 port attribute configuration for E1 cards.

Page 104: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-20 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

To configure E1 cards:

1. In the NE shelf view window, select an E1 card in the left object tree. Then select the E1 Ports tab under the Configuration working mode.

2. Click Apply to save your settings.

3. Click to retrieve the information.

Page 105: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-21

E3 Cards These are the E3 cards:

P345_3: 3 configurable E3/DS3 card for BG-40.

M345_3: 3 configurable E3/DS3 card for BG-20.

M345_2: 2 configurable E3/DS3 card for BG-40.

PM345_3: 3 configurable E3/DS3 card for BG-30B and BG-64.

P345_3E: 3 configurable E3/DS3 extension card in BG-20E.

To configure E3 cards:

1. In the NE shelf view window, select an E3 card in the left object tree. Then select the E3/DS3 Ports tab under the Configuration working mode.

2. Click Apply to save your settings.

3. Click to retrieve the information.

Page 106: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-22 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

SDH Cards This section describes the SDH cards.

SAM-1/SAM-4 The SAM1/4 is not a physical card or module, but is an abstract object of the BG-20B SDH interface. The BG-20B SDH interface is STM-1/4-compatible, and can be switched between STM-1 and STM-4 smoothly by software configuration without affecting traffic.

Upgrading the BG-20B from STM-1 to STM-4 or installing a BG-20B as an STM-4 NE requires a license. The STM-4 license is based on the NE serial number, and is issued by ECI Telecom against an appropriate purchase order accompanied by a list of required serial numbers.

NOTE: For details about handling license keys for an STM-4 license, refer to Managing License.

To switch between SAM1 and SAM4:

1. In the BG-20 NE shelf view window, select Configuration > Slot Assignment from the menu. The Slot Assignment window opens.

Page 107: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-23

2. Right-click on the A1 or A2 slot and select SAM4 from the pop-up menu.

3. Click Apply to save the change. The SDH interface is smoothly switched to

STM-4.

Page 108: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-24 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

SMD4 SMD4 provides two STM-4 ports. It can only be inserted to Tslot 2# and Tslot 3# of BG-30B, and can only be assigned in ADM-16 configurations.

VC-4 Contiguous Concatenation The following cards support VC-4 concatenation:

SAM-16

SAMQ

SMS4

SMD4

SMQ1_4

In these cards, VC-4s can be concatenated. After being concatenated, the four VC-4s can only operate as one managed object until concatenation is released. A VC-4 concatenation can only be released when no trail exists on it.

To create VC-4 contiguous concatenation:

1. In the NE shelf view window, in the left object tree, select the card that support VC-4 concatenation. Then select the VC-4 Concatenation tab under the Configuration working mode.

2. Select the VC-4-4c concatenated checkbox as required.

3. Click Apply to save your changes.

Page 109: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-25

SMQ1&4 The SMQ1&4 card can be inserted to any Tslot of BG-30B and BG-64, but can only be assigned in ADM-16 configurations. It has four SDH ports and each port rate is STM-1/4 compatible.

To change rate for SMQ1&4:

1. In a BG-30 or BG-64 NE shelf view window, in the left object tree, select a port under SMQ1&4 card. Then select the Rate Setting tab under the Configuration working mode, as shown in the following figure.

2. Click in the toolbar to get the information from the database in order to view it.

3. Select the Change rate to STM-4 radio button as required.

4. Click Apply to save your changes.

Page 110: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-26 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

SMS16 SMD4 is a single STM-16 IO card with SFP based STM-16 interface. It has same PCB as SMQ1&4 and can only be assigned in BG-30B ADM-16 system and BG64.

The SMS16 card can provide the following features:

Supports 1 X STM-16 and can be inserted to BG-30B ADM-16 system and BG64

Based on SFP modules and supports uncolored and colored SFP.

Provides the backplane interfacing with 2 x 2.5G ESSI links, STM-16 Framing, HOPP, TUPP and L-code insertion functions

Traffic and Timing signals connect to both XIO cards and supports the switching between two XIO cards with ACT signals from two XIO cards

Provides one timing references to each XIO card

Provides the conversion between RS&MS bytes and System Overhead interface (8M PCM).

Without local CPU and is controlled by CPU in MCP30

Output 1 timing reference clock to TMU.

External interfaces: 1 x STM-16: SFP Channel LEDs: 1 x laser On Card level LEDs: ACT, FAIL

Page 111: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-27

XIO30-1/XIO30-4/XIO30-16/XIO30Q_1&4 The XIO30 card integrates the cross-connect matrix, timing module, and SAM module. The XIO30-1 card contains the SAM1 module, the XIO30-4 contains the SAM4 module, the XIO30-16 contains the SAM16 module, and the XIO30Q_1&4 contains the SAMQ module. The XIO30 card supports 1+1 protection. This means that, from a logical perspective, there is always one main XIO30 card and one standby XIO30 card.

The ADM rate is decided by the XIO30 card type:

XIO30-1: ADM-1

XIO30-4: ADM-4

XIO30-16: ADM-16

XIO30Q_1&4: 4 x ADM-1/4

For XIO30Q_1&4, its SAMQ module has four SDH ports and each port rate is STM-1/4 compatible, which is the same with SMQ1&4 (on page 7-25).

For XIO30-1, XIO30-4 and XIO30-16 cards, an ADM rate change is achieved by XIO30 reassignment:

XIO30-1 can be reassigned to XIO30-4 or XIO30-16 without removing existing traffic.

XIO30-4 can be reassigned to XIO30-1 or XIO30-16 without removing existing traffic.

And you can perform downgrading from XIO30-16 to XIO30-1 or XIO30-4 in the BG-30 Slot Assignment window.

Page 112: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-28 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

To perform reassignment for XIO30-1 and XIO30-4:

1. In a BG-30 NE shelf view window, select XS A:XIO30-1 in the left object tree. Then select the Reassign tab under Configuration working mode.

2. Select the relevant reassign radio button in the window.

3. Click Apply. A confirmation window opens as shown below.

Click Yes to confirm.

4. When XIO cards are reassigned to XIO30-16, the following window opens upon successful completion of the reassignment.

Page 113: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-29

To downgrade from XIO30-16 to XIO30-1 or XIO30-4:

1. Remove the traffic on the corresponding VC-4 on the XIO30-16 card, and make sure that there is no SMD4 assigned on the Tslots.

2. In a BG-30 NE shelf view window, select the NE in the left object tree and then select Configuration > Slot Assignment in the menu.

3. Right-click on the XS A slot and, from the pop-up menu, select the XIO

card that you want to assign.

Before the reassignment command is sent to the BG-30 NE, the LCT-BGF checks the traffic on the corresponding VC-4 of the XIO30-16 card. If traffic exists, the reassignment cannot continue and the LCT-BGF displays a warning message.

4. Click Apply to save your change.

Page 114: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-30 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Data Cards The data cards are sorted into Layer 1 cards, Layer 2 cards, and EOP cards, as described in this section.

L1 Cards This section describes the Layer 1 cards.

L1B_6F The L1B_6F is a Layer 1 data card in BG-20B. This section describes how to configure L1B_6F card attribute.

To configure L1B_6F card attribute:

1. In a BG-20 NE shelf view window, select the L1B_6F card in the left object tree. In the General tab under Configuration working mode, you can view the general information of L1B_6F.

Page 115: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-31

2. To configure the EoS encapsulation protocol, select the EoS Ports tab in the above window.

This window contains the EoS Protocol information and General information settings. Set the parameters as required and click Apply to save your changes.

Page 116: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-32 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

3. To perform VCG configuration, in the left object tree, right-click on the L1B_6F card or an EoS port. In the pop-up menu, select Create VCG. The VCG Attribute window opens.

Use this window to configure the virtual cascade mode (E1), the bandwidth of each VCG, and the LCAS attributes.

Page 117: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-33

4. To add or remove a VCG member, select the VCG in the object tree. Then select the Configuration working mode.

For every member of this VCG, the E1s can be deactivated from this VCG.

5. To configure the port attribute, select an EoS port in the object tree. Then select the Configuration working mode.

Page 118: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-34 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

6. To view real-time traffic, select the L1B_6F card in the left object tree. Then select the EoS Current Payload Rate tab under Maintenance working mode.

In this window, you acquire the Rx and Tx traffic of EoS and FE ports (ports 1 through 6). The traffic here refers to the average traffic within the first 15 minutes in the acquisition process.

For the acquired traffic information, the data display unit is specified in bps.

Page 119: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-35

7. To perform loopback maintenance, select the Loopback tab under Maintenance working mode.

The Loopback Type values are Terminal Loopback, Facility Loopback, and No Loopback. The default is No Loopback.

8. To perform MST maintenance, select VCG in the left object tree, and then select the Maintenance working mode.

For LCAS members, the MST FAIL force/release function can be performed. MST Attribute values are Auto and Force Fail. The default is Auto.

Page 120: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-36 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

MGE_1_L1 The MGE_1_L1 is a single GbE module that supports hot insertion with layer 1 functionality in BG-20B.

Its functionality is the same as the DMGE_1_L1 (on page 7-36).

DMFE_4_L1 The DMFE_4_L1 is a Layer 1 data card that supports 4 x 10/100BaseT LAN interfaces and 4 x EoS WAN interfaces for the BG-30B. It supports live insertion.

You can manage the DMFE_4_L1 as per the L1B_6F (on page 7-30).

DMFX_4_L1 The DMFX_4_L1 is a Layer 1 card that can be inserted into any Tslot in BG-30B.

Most of its functions are the same as those of the DMFE_4_L1 (on page 7-36), apart from the physical interfaces:

Four 100Base-FX interfaces.

Optical connector type: SFP and LC.

An SFP module that supports laser parameters monitoring and relevant TCAs.

Laser control: Force on, Force off (the default is on).

DMGE_1_L1 The DMGE_1_L1 card supports one GbE interface with a total bandwidth of 4 x VC-4 and can be inserted into any Tslot in BG-30B.

The functionality of the DMGE_1_L1 is very similar to DMFE_4_L1 (on page 7-36), except that it has only one VCG and one port, and only supports one LAN interface (GbE).

The DMGE_1_L1 supports the following:

1 x GbE interface, based on the SFP module.

1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX, and electrical SFP.

ADM622 as the EoS mapper.

One EoS channel, which can be VC-12, VC-3, and VC-4 concatenations. The maximum bandwidth is 4 x VC-4.

GFP encapsulation.

A Force-link-on maintenance operation for FE interfaces physical testing.

Page 121: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-37

The same XIO switch-over scheme as that used on the DMFE_4_L1.

VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 monitor termination using an auxiliary port of a PM5337.

Local XC capability by a PM5337 core XC module.

Customer Signal Failure(CSF) and Trail Signal Failure(TSF). They are both controlled by the setting of CSF.

BIT.

To configure DMGE_1_L1 port attribute:

1. In a BG-30 NE shelf view window, select an EoS port of the DMGE_1_L1 card in the object tree. Then select the Configuration working mode.

2. Set the parameters as required.

3. Click Apply to save your changes.

4. Click to retrieve the information from NE equipment.

5. When Negotiation is set to Enable, you can click in the toolbar to restart auto-negotiation.

Page 122: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-38 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

DMGE_4_L1 The DMGE_4_L1 supports 4 GbE interfaces with standard EoS L1 functionality. The total bandwidth is 16 x VC-4. It can be inserted to any TSlot in BG-30B, but can only be used in ADM-16 system including XIO30Q_1&4 system.

The DMGE_1_L1 supports the following:

VC-4/VC-3/VC-12 virtual concatenation, LCAS and GFP

Optical and electrical SFP

4 GbE LAN interfaces based on SFPs and 4 EoS WAN interfaces

Local CPU to improve survivability

To configure DMGE_4_L1 port attribute:

1. In a BG-30 NE shelf view window, select an EoS port of the DMGE_4_L1 card in the object tree. Then select the Configuration working mode.

2. Set the parameters as required.

3. Click Apply to save your changes.

4. Click to retrieve the information from NE equipment.

5. When Negotiation is set to Enable, you can click in the toolbar to restart auto-negotiation.

Page 123: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-39

L2 Cards

MESW_6F The MESW_6F is a data card on the BG-20B that can provide not only Ethernet Private Line (EPL) service, but also Ethernet Virtual Private Local Area Network (EVPLAN) service. The MESW_6F can also manage the Ethernet’s QoS and bandwidth.

MESW_6F card management objects can be:

ETY interfaces

Switch

EoS interfaces (ports, EoSs, VCGs)

Managing Ports

The MESW_6F card has 14 FE ports, six of which are ETY ports that connect to the local side and eight of which are EoS ports that connect to the remote

side through an EoS mapper.

To configure MESW_6F card attributes:

1. In a BG-20 NE shelf view window, select the MESW_6F card in the left object tree. In the General tab under the Configuration working mode, you can view the general information of the MESW_6F.

Page 124: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-40 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

2. To configure the ETY port attribute, select the ETY Ports tab in the above window.

In this window, the following attributes can be configured:

Auto-Negotiation: Values are Auto-negotiation or no Auto-negotiation. The default is Auto-negotiation (enabled).

Local Pause Mode: The default is No Pause. Speed: 100M or 10M. The default is 100M. Duplex: Full or Half. The default is Full.

Page 125: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-41

3. To configure the EoS encapsulation protocol and the EoS port attribute settings, select the EoS Ports tab in the window.

For the MESW_6F card’s EoS channel, one of two types of

encapsulation protocol can be designated: GFPF (the default) LAPS

The Send FCS may be Enabled or Disabled. The default is Disabled. The Dedicate attribute value may be Yes or No.

For the EoS port attributes, three attributes can be configured and three attributes are read-only. Read-only attributes are:

Duplex Status Speed Status Flow Control Status

Configurable attributes are: NNI/UNI setting. Default settings are:

I-NNI for EoS port 1 through EoS port 4. UNI for EoS port 5 through EoS port 8.

Max Package Length: The valid range is 1518 bytes to 9022 bytes. The default is 9022 bytes.

Subnetwork ID: Can be set for each WAN port. It is used to distinguish the VLAN subnetwork.

Page 126: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-42 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

4. To configure the port licenses of the ETY ports, select the Port Licenses tab in the window.

Page 127: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-43

5. To perform VCG configuration, in the left object tree, right-click on the MESW_6F card or an EoS port. In the pop-up menu, select Create VCG. The VCG Attribute window opens.

Use this window to configure the virtual cascade mode (VC-12/VC-3/VC-4), bandwidth of each VCG, and LCAS attributes.

Page 128: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-44 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

6. To add or remove a VCG member, select the VCG in the object tree. Then select the Configuration working mode.

For each member of this VCG, a Deactivated attribute can be set. This entails removing the member from the VCG.

7. To configure a single EoS port attribute, select an EoS port in the object tree. Then select the Configuration working mode.

Page 129: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-45

8. To view real-time traffic, select the MESW_6F card in the left object tree and then select the EoS Current Payload Rate tab under the Maintenance working mode.

In this window, you acquire the Rx and Tx traffic of EoS ports (ports 1 through to 8). The traffic here refers to the average traffic within the first 15 minutes in the acquisition process.

For the acquired traffic information, the data display unit is specified in bps.

Page 130: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-46 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

9. To perform loopback maintenance, select the Loopback tab under the Maintenance working mode.

The Loopback Type values are Terminal Loopback, Facility Loopback, and No Loopback. The default is No loopback.

Set the Loopback Type for each VCG in this window, and click Apply to save the configuration in the database and the NE.

Page 131: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-47

10. To perform MST maintenance, select a VCG in the left object tree and then select the Maintenance working mode.

For LCAS members, the MST FAIL force/release function can be performed. MST Attribute values are Auto and Force Fail. The default is Auto.

Managing a Link Aggregation Group

The MESW_6F supports up to 13 aggregation groups. An aggregation can be supported in the MESW_6F, as follows:

Two/four ports for NNI WAN FE ports

Two/four ports for UNI LAN FE ports

Two/four ports for UNI WAN FE ports

User can also configuring a link aggregation group. Server load balancing and failover mechanisms are supported via flexible link aggregation that is based on the MAC destination and source addresses. The port within an LAG that is to be used as a destination can be selected based on the Ethernet source and/or destination address or the IP source and/or destination address. The MESW_6F card does not support IP addresses.

Page 132: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-48 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

To create LAGs:

1. In a BG-20 NE shelf view window, in the left object tree, right-click on the MESW_6F card and select Create LAG in the pop-up menu. The Create/Edit Aggregation Ports window opens.

Page 133: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-49

2. Select an aggregation group from the Aggregation Group dropdown list.

Page 134: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-50 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

3. Select ports in the left list and click to add the ports to the right aggregation group.

4. To remove a port from the right aggregation group, select the port(s) in the

right list and click .

5. Click Apply to save the results.

Page 135: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-51

To configure an LAG:

1. In the BG-20 NE shelf view window, select the MESW_6F card in the left object tree. Then select the LAGs tab under the Configuration working mode.

2. Select the required aggregate groups in the Aggregation Group list.

3. Select the trunk mode in the Trunk Mode dropdown list. Trunk mode is used to select a physical port on a LAG on which to send packets. This mode is also called Distribution Algorithm. The distribution algorithm implements load sharing between all ports in the LAG while maintaining the order of packets for each service. The supported trunk modes are:

Source MAC: Packets with different source MAC addresses are sent through different physical ports of the LAG.

Destination MAC: Packets with different destination MAC addresses are sent through different physical ports of the LAG.

Source XOR Destination MAC: Packets with different source MAC addresses or different destination MAC addresses are sent through different physical ports of the LAG. This is the default mode.

Although all three modes ensure the packet order in each service, the difference between them is the level of load sharing. Source XOR Destination MAC provides the best load sharing between physical ports of the LAG.

4. Click Apply to save the settings.

Page 136: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-52 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Managing the Bandwidth Profile

A bandwidth profile is used when creating a policer. This profile affects the MESW_6F card, and enables you to change the bandwidth to meet the policer requirements, if needed.

To access the bandwidth profile:

1. In the BG-20 NE shelf view window, select MESW_6F > Switch in the left object tree. Then select the Bandwidth Profile tab under the Services working mode.

2. Click in the toolbar to restore the default bandwidth profile.

3. Click to retrieve the bandwidth profile from the equipment.

4. Change the Committed Information Rate (CIR) and Committed Burst Size (CBS) values as required, and click Apply to save the settings.

NOTE: Due to a hardware limitation, the MESW_6F card only supports eight bandwidth profile levels.

Page 137: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-53

Managing Policers

When creating PB MPtMP, each UNI port must have a policer. Each policer can be used only once. Policers’ values can be identical, except for the policer name. Up to 128 policers can be defined per MESW_6F card.

To create a policer:

1. In the BG-20 NE shelf view window, select the MESW_6F > Switch in the left object tree. Then select the Policer Profile List tab under the Services working mode.

Page 138: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-54 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

2. To create a policer, click the Create Policer button in the toolbar. The Create Policer Profile window opens.

3. In the Create Policer Profile window, enter the following parameters for

the policer: Policer Name: Enter a name for the policer. Policer Profile ID: Enter a numeric value between 1 and 128 for the

policer. Up to 128 policers can be defined. CIR: Select the Committed Information Rate (CIR) in the dropdown

list. CBS: Select the Committed Burst Size (CBS) in the dropdown list. S-VLAN CoS: Select the Class of Service (COS) where the customer’s

traffic enters the provider’s network. Service State: Select Enabled or Disabled in the dropdown list to

enable or disable the service. The default is Enabled.

4. Click Apply to create the policer.

Page 139: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-55

To use the policer list:

1. You can view the policer list in the following window:

2. To edit a policer, select the policer in the Policer Profile List and select the

Edit Policer button in the toolbar. The Edit Policer Profile window opens.

Change the policer values as required, and click Apply to save the settings.

Page 140: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-56 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

3. To view the details of a policer, select the policer and click in the toolbar. The View Policer Profile window opens.

4. To delete a policer, select the policer in the list and click in the toolbar. To delete all of the policers in the list, click the Select All button and

then click . Click to deselect all.

5. To upload policers, click the Policer Upload button in the toolbar. The Policer Profile Upload window opens, as shown below.

Page 141: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-57

Click Upload to upload policers from the MESW_6F card.

The status bar shows the consistency status between the NE and the database. Click Overwrite to overwrite the database with the NE data.

If the NE and the database are inconsistent, select the Policer Profile Compare tab to display the inconsistency results.

Page 142: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-58 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Managing VSI Services

The MESW_6F supports a Virtual Private Network (VSI). VSIs define policies and provide users' Service Level Agreements (SLAs).

The MESW_6F supports the following VSI types:

EPL

PB MPtMP

Creating an EPL

This section describes how to create an EPL for MESW_6F.

To create an EPL:

1. In the BG-20 NE shelf view window, select MESW_6F > Switch in the left object tree. Then select the VSI List tab under the Services working mode.

Page 143: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-59

2. Click the Create VSI button in the toolbar. The Create VSI window opens.

3. To create an EPL, select EPL from the Service Type drop-down list.

4. Enter the values of VSI ID, NMS VSI ID, User Label and Customer in the respective fields.

5. Select the Enabled CSF checkbox, if needed. You can also input additional description into the VSI Description field.

Page 144: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-60 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

6. In the right Objects Selections area, select one ETY port and one EoS port or two EoS port in the relevant list. Right-click an object to deselect, or you can select an object in the lower-right list and click in the toolbar.

You can also click in the toolbar to create a policer.

7. Click Active to create and activate the EPL. If you click Save, the EPL will be saved but not activated. To activate it, select the Recent Saved VSIs tab.

8. Select the VSI you want to activate in this window and click Active. The

EPL then is activated.

Page 145: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-61

Creating PB MPtMP

This section describes how to create PB MPtMP for the MESW_6F.

To create PB MPtMP:

1. In the BG-20 NE shelf view window, select MESW_6F > Switch in the left object tree. Then select the VSI List tab under the Services working mode.

Page 146: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-62 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

2. Click the Create VSI button in the toolbar. The Create VSI window opens.

3. To create PB MPtMP, select PB MPtMP from the Service Type drop-

down list.

4. Enter the VSI ID, NMS VSI ID, User Label, Customer, S-VLAN, and vFIB Quota values in the left areas of the window. The vFIB Total Reserved Entries field indicates the total number of reserved entries in the vFIB. You can also input additional description into the VSI Description field.

Page 147: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-63

5. In the right Objects Selections area, select ETY ports and EoS ports as you want in the relevant list. Right-click an object to deselect, or you can select an object in the lower-right list and click in the toolbar.

You can click in the toolbar to create a policer.

6. For the selected UNI ports, the Tag Type and C-VLAN ID values should be set. User can click "+" to expand the UNI port and can enlarge the lower-right area by dragging the separating line above the toolbar, as shown below.

Page 148: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-64 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

7. In the Tag Type & C-VIDs field, select the Specific C-VIDs checkbox and define the C-VID range. Also, select the Untagged and the Priority Tagged checkboxes if needed. To add PVID for an untagged FE-ETY port, select the Double tag checkbox and set the number in the field next to.

8. To map policers, click in the toolbar and select the corresponding port where you want to perform CoS-Mapping. The following window opens.

Page 149: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-65

Input the tags listed in the Available Tags into the Add Tags area and click Add. To delete the CVlans, select the Delete Priority & Policer Mapping radio button.

Click "+", in the expanded area, select the Priority values in the From and To dropdown lists, and select a policer in the Policer dropdown list. Click Add to add the policer to the C-VLAN.

Do the same operation for the other CVLans. Click Save to save your settings.

Page 150: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-66 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

9. Repeat Step 8 to map policers for other UNI ports.

10. Click Active to create and activate the PB MPtMP. If you click Save, the

PB MPtMP will be saved but not activated. To activate it, select the Recent Saved VSIs tab.

Select the VSI you want to activate in this window and click Active. The PB MPtMP then is activated.

Page 151: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-67

Using the VSI List

The VSI list enables you to view and manage VSI items.

To use the VSI list:

1. You can view the VSI list in the following window:

2. To activate a VSI, select a VSI in the list and click in the toolbar. Click to deactivate it.

Page 152: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-68 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

3. To Edit a VSI, select the VSI in the list and select the Edit VSI button in the toolbar The Edit VSI window opens.

Modify the VSI as required, and click Apply to save the settings.

4. To view the details of a VSI, select the VSI and click in the toolbar. The View VSI window opens.

Page 153: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-69

5. To delete a VSI, select the VSI in the list and click in the toolbar. To delete all of the VSIs in the list, click the Select All button and then

click . Click to deselect all.

6. To upload VSIs, click the VSI Upload button in the toolbar. The VSI Upload window opens, as shown below.

Click Upload to upload VSIs from the MESW_6F card.

The status bar shows the consistency status between the NE and the database. If the NE and the database are inconsistent, select the VSI Compare tab to display the inconsistency results.

Click Save To DB to send the data from the NE to database, or click Delete from DB to delete the data from database.

Page 154: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-70 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

7. User can also access some operations from the right-click menu, as shown below.

Configuring the vFIB

vFIB-related operations include configuring the Aging Time, flushing the vFIB, and configuring the Port Lock.

The MESW_6F has a dynamic address-learning function. All the dynamically learned addresses need aging.

The MESW_6F has seven levels of aging time: 280 seconds 70 minutes 210 minutes 14 hours 64 hours One day No aging

The following considerations apply to the aging process: When an address is learned dynamically, the aging timer is started. If the address can be learned during the Aging Time, it is removed from the

vFIB. The Aging Time is the initial value for the aging timer. If no aging mechanism is used, the vFIB may contain many invalid

addresses.

Page 155: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-71

To configure vFIB settings for MESW_6F:

1. In the BG-20 NE shelf view window, select MESW_6F > Switch in the left object tree. Then select the vFIB Setting tab under the Configuration working mode.

2. Set the Aging Time value and the Port Lock status. When the Port Lock is

enabled, the address-learning function is disabled. If a MAC frame contains a new source MAC address, this frame is discarded.

3. Click Apply to save the setting.

Page 156: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-72 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

To use the vFIB list:

1. In the BG-20 NE shelf view window, select MESW_6F > Switch in the left object tree. Then select the vFIB List tab under the Services working mode.

2. To flush a specific VSI, select the VSI from the VSI drop-down list in the

Filter area and click the Flush button in the toolbar.

3. To flush all the VSIs, select the Flush All button in the toolbar.

Page 157: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-73

4. To add new items to vFIB tables, select the Static radio button in the Filter area, then click . The Create New Static vFIB Entry window opens.

Set the VSI ID, MAC and Port, then click Apply to create.

5. To view the vFIB items, select the attributes you want to view in the Filter area and then click Get & Filter.

6. Click Query to retrieve the static vFIB items.

Page 158: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-74 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Tracing the MAC Address

The Trace MAC Address feature enables you to show which ports/VSIs/NEs correspond to the input MAC address.

To trace the MAC address:

1. In the BG-20 NE shelf view window, select MESW_6F > Switch in the left object tree and then select the Maintenance working mode.

2. Input the MAC address in the Enter MAC address field.

3. Click Apply to display the results.

Configuring MSTP

The MESW_6F supports the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP).

For details about configuring MSTP, refer to Configuring STP and MSTP.

Page 159: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-75

DMFE_4_L2 The DMFE_4_L2 is a Layer 2 data card that provides Ethernet switched service.

The card contains the following main functional blocks:

4 x FE PHY

8 x EoS mapper with an ESSI interface module

Flexible L2 packet processor module

Local CPU with HDLC processing module

The DMFE_4_L2 card also supports MPLS services.

For the details of MPLS services, refer to the chapter Managing MPLS Services (on page 8-1).

Managing Ports

The DMFE_4_L2 card has 12 FE ports, four of which are ETY ports that connect to the local side through an RJ-45 connector and eight of which are EoS ports that connect to the remote side through an EoS mapper. Each EoS port is fixed to connect one EoS channel with a PHY interface.

All 12 FE ports are interconnected by a switch core. All NE configuration data is stored on the NVM card. The system retrieves NE data from the NVM card after a reset. NE replacement is implemented by inserting the NVM card into a new BG-30. No other actions are required.

Page 160: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-76 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

To configure DMFE_4_L2 card attributes:

1. In a BG-30 NE shelf view window, select the DMFE_4_L2 card in the left object tree. In the General tab under Configuration working mode, you can view the DMFE_4_L2's general information.

2. To configure the ETY port attribute, select the ETY Ports tab in the above

window.

Page 161: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-77

The default type for all ETY ports is UNI.

For a UNI port type, the following attributes can be configured:

Untagged Frame: Frames can be block, forward, or forward with PVID. The default is forward.

Priority Tagged Frame: Frames can be block, forward, or forward with PVID. The default is forward.

PVID: The range is 0-4094. The default is N/A. This field can only be set when forward with PVID is selected in the Untagged Frame field.

Default CD Priority: The range is 0-7. The default is 0.

If a port is configured as forwarded with PVID, then this port is dedicated as an Untagged type and can only be added once.

3. To configure the EoS encapsulation protocol and the EoS port attribute settings, select the EoS Ports tab in the window.

The type for EoS ports can be UNI, I-NNI, or E-NNI.

I-NNI is an internal NNI within the provider domain. E-NNI is an external NNI that connects external devices.

The default value for the EoS ports 1 through 4 is UNI and for the others is I-NNI.

For more details about port management for the DMFE_4_L2, refer to Managing Ports (on page 7-39) in the MESW_6F.

Page 162: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-78 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

CoS Shapping and CoS WRED

For the DMFE_4_L2 card, you can configure CoS shapping for each ETY port, and configure both CoS shapping and CoS WRED for the each EoS port. This section describes how to configure CoS shapping and CoS WRED for DMFE_4_L2 card.

To configure CoS shapping:

1. In the DMFE_4_L2 shelf view window, in the left object tree, select an ETY or EoS port. Then select the CoS Shapping tab under the Configuration working mode.

2. Click to retrieve the information to view.

3. Setting the parameters for each CoS as needed.

4. Click Apply to save your settings.

Page 163: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-79

To configure CoS WRED:

1. In the DMFE_4_L2 shelf view window, in the left object tree, select an EoS port. Then select the CoS WRED tab under the Configuration working mode.

2. Click to retrieve the information to view.

3. Setting the attributes for each CoS as needed.

4. Click Apply to save your settings.

Managing a Link Aggregation Group

Use the following procedure to configure a link aggregation group (LAG) in the DMFE_4_L2.

NOTE: The procedures described in this section also apply to other data cards, such as the DMFX_4_L2, MPS_6F and DMGE_2_L2.

Page 164: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-80 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

To create LAGs:

1. In a BG-30 NE shelf view window, in the left object tree, right-click on the DMFE_4_L2 card and select Create LAG in the pop-up menu. The Create/Edit Aggregation Ports window opens.

2. Select an aggregation group from the Aggregation Group dropdown list.

3. Select ports in the left list and click to add the ports to the right aggregation group.

Page 165: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-81

If a port is added to a LAG with LAG Distribution Enable value set to disabled, or the LAG port member is changed from LAG Distribution enabled to disabled, the LAG’s traffic is not distributed to the port, and the packets received from that port are not discarded.

4. To remove a port from the right aggregation group, select the port(s) in the right list and click .

5. Select the LAG Distribution Enable checkbox, if needed, set the Hold Off Time and click Apply to save the results.

To configure an LAG:

1. In the BG-30 NE shelf view window, select the LAG object in the left object tree. Then select the Configuration working mode.

2. Modify the LAG as needed and click Apply to save the settings.

Page 166: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-82 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

EFM Link OAM

Ethernet in the First Mile Link Operation, Administration, and Maintenance, or EFM Link OAM, has the following objectives:

Remote failure indication: indicates to a peer that the receive path of the local port is not operational.

Remote loopback control: supports data-link layer frame-level loopback mode.

Link monitoring: supports event notification that permits the inclusion of diagnostic information. Link monitoring tools are used to detect and indicate link faults under a variety of circumstances.

To manage ETY maintenance:

1. In a BG-30 NE shelf view window, select the DMFE_4_L2 card in the left object tree. Then select the ETY Maintenance tab under the Maintenance working mode.

2. Set the parameters for Link OAM attribute and Link OAM remote

loopback.

3. Click Apply to save your settings.

4. Click to retrieve the information to view.

Page 167: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-83

To manage ETY Link OAM events and threshold:

1. In a BG-30 NE shelf view window, select the DMFE_4_L2 card in the left object tree. Then select the ETY Link OAM Window and Threshold tab under the Maintenance working mode.

2. Set the parameters in the window.

3. Click Apply to save your settings.

4. Click to retrieve the information to view.

Page 168: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-84 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

To view ETY Link OAM events statistics:

1. In a BG-30 NE shelf view window, select an ETY port in the left object tree. Then select the ETY Link OAM Events Statistics tab under the Maintenance working mode.

2. Click to retrieve the information to view.

Configuring the vFIB

The DMFE_4_L2 Fiber Database (vFIB) table length is 32 K.

The DMFE_4_L2's vFIB can flush:

All vFIBs for an entire bridge

A vFIB for a specific VSI

A vFIB for a specific port on a given VSI

Page 169: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-85

To use the vFIB list:

1. In the BG-20 NE shelf view window, select DMFE_4_L2 > Switch in the left object tree. Then select the vFIB List tab under the Services working mode.

2. To flush a specific VSI, select the VSI from the VSI drop-down list in the

Filter area and click the Flush button in the toolbar.

3. To flush all the VSIs, select the Flush All button in the toolbar.

Page 170: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-86 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

4. To add new items to vFIB tables, select the Static radio button in the Filter area, then click . The Create New Static vFIB Entry window opens.

Set the VSI ID, MAC and Port, then click Apply to create.

5. To view the vFIB items, select the attributes you want to view in the Filter area and then click Get & Filter.

6. Click Query to retrieve the static vFIB items.

Page 171: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-87

Tracing the MAC Address

The Trace MAC Address feature enables you to show which ports/VSIs/NEs correspond to the input MAC address.

To trace the MAC address:

1. In the BG-30 NE shelf view window, select DMFE_4_L2 > Switch in the left object tree. Then select the Trace MAC tab under the Maintenance working mode.

2. Input the MAC address in the Enter MAC address field.

3. Click Apply to display the results.

Configuring MSTP

The DMFE_4_L2 supports the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP).

For details about configuring MSTP, refer to Configuring STP and MSTP.

Page 172: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-88 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Managing Policers

When creating PB PtP or PB MPtMP, each UNI port must have a policer. Each policer can be used only once. Policers’ values can be identical, except for the policer name.

To create a policer:

1. In the BG-30 NE shelf view window, select DMFE_4_L2 > Switch in the left object tree and then select the Policer Profile List tab under the Services working mode.

Page 173: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-89

2. To create a policer, click the Create Policer button in the toolbar. The Create Policer Profile window opens.

3. In the Create Policer Profile window, enter the following parameters for

the policer: Policer Name: Enter a name for the policer. Policer Profile ID: Enter a numeric value between 1 and 128 for the

policer. Up to 128 policers can be defined. CIR: Set the Committed Information Rate (CIR). CBS: Set the Committed Burst Size (CBS). CM: Select the Color Mode (CM) in the drop-down list. CF: Select Coupling Flag (CF) as in the drop-down list.

4. Click Apply to create the policer.

Page 174: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-90 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

To use the policer list:

1. You can view the policer list in the following window:

2. To edit a policer, select the policer in the Policer Profile List and select the

Edit Policer button in the toolbar. The Edit Policer Profile window opens.

Change the policer values as required, and click Apply to save the settings.

Page 175: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-91

3. To view the details of a policer, select the policer and click in the toolbar. The View Policer Profile window opens.

4. To delete a policer, select the policer in the list and click in the toolbar. To delete all of the policers in the list, click the Select All button and

then click . Click to deselect all.

5. To upload policers, click the Policer Upload button in the toolbar, the Policer Profile Upload window opens, as shown below.

Page 176: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-92 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Click Upload to upload policers from the DMFE_4_L2 card.

The status bar shows the consistency status between the NE and the database. If the NE and the database are inconsistent, select the Policer Profile Compare tab to display the inconsistency results.

Click Overwrite to overwrite the database with the NE data.

Page 177: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-93

Managing VSI Services

The DMFE_4_L2 supports the following VSI types:

EPL

PB PtP

PB MPtMP

Creating an EPL

This section describes how to create an EPL for DMFE_4_L2.

To create an EPL:

1. In the BG-30 NE shelf view window, select DMFE_4_L2 > Switch in the left object tree. Then select the VSI List tab under the Services working mode.

Page 178: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-94 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

2. Click the Create VSI button in the toolbar. The Create VSI window opens.

3. To create an EPL, select EPL from the Service Type dropdown list.

4. Select the VSI State by selecting the radio button. When disabled, all policers block their traffic, including NNI ports. When enabled, all policers enable traffic flow. This field is editable with no constraints. The default is Enabled.

5. Enter the values of VSI ID, User Label, and Customer in the respective fields.

6. Select the Enabled CSF checkbox, if needed. You can also input additional description into the VSI Description field.

Page 179: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-95

7. In the right Objects Selections area, select one ETY port and one EoS port or two EoS port in the relevant list. Right-click an object to deselect, or you can select an object in the lower-right list and click in the toolbar.

You can click in the toolbar to create a policer.

8. Click Active to create and activate the EPL. If you click Save, the EPL will be saved but not activated. To activate it, select the Recent Saved VSIs tab.

9. Select the VSI you want to activate in this window and click Active. The

EPL then is activated.

Page 180: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-96 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Creating PB PtP

This section describes how to create PB PtP for DMFE_4_L2.

To create PB PtP:

1. In the BG-30 NE shelf view window, select DMFE_4_L2 > Switch in the left object tree. Then select the VSI List tab under the Services working mode.

Page 181: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-97

2. Click the Create VSI button in the toolbar. The Create VSI window opens.

3. To create PB PtP, select PB PtP from the Service Type dropdown list.

4. Select the VSI State by selecting the radio button. When disabled, all policers block their traffic, including NNI ports. When enabled, all policers enable traffic flow. This field is editable with no constraints. The default is Enabled.

5. Enter the VSI ID, User Label, Customer and S-VLAN values in the left areas of the window. You can also input additional description into the VSI Description field.

Page 182: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-98 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

6. In the right Objects Selections area, you can select one ETY port and EoS port, or two EoS ports as you want in the relevant list. Right-click an object to deselect, or you can select an object in the lower-right list and click in the toolbar.

You can click in the toolbar to create a policer.

7. All selected VSI UNI or E-NNI ports have the same Ethernet priority, which is determined by the provider CoS mapping policy. This mapping is defined in the UNI Ingress CoS Mapping, E-NNI Ingress CoS Mapping, and E-NNI Egress CoS Priority Swapping fields in the Create VSI window. Click "+" to expand the UNI port and can enlarge the lower-right area by click the icon above the toolbar, as shown below.

The following apply when defining the CoS mapping:

For each priority (0 to 7), only one provider CoS should be selected. The default is CoS0 for all priorities.

All priority values should be mapped. The priority value of untagged frames is defined in the UNI port

attributes. Any change that conflicts with an already defined policer or that is set

with No Rate Limit is rejected.

A CoS can only be removed or discarded from the mapping when it is not associated with No Rate Limit or a policer profile. When this occurs, the operation is rejected and the following message is displayed: A policer is associated with this CoS.

Page 183: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-99

8. In the Tag Type & C-VIDs field, select the Specific C-VIDs checkbox and define the C-VID range. Also, select the Untagged, Priority Tagged, and Tag Translation checkboxes if needed.

Select in the toolbar, the following window opens.

Page 184: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-100 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Use this window to add, move, delete tags, or delete groups by selecting the corresponding radio button.

9. Click Active to create and activate the PB PtP. If you click Save, the PB

PtP will be saved but not activated. To activate it, select the Recent Saved VSIs tab.

10. Select the VSI you want to activate in this window and click Active. The

PB PtP then is activated.

Page 185: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-101

Creating PB MPtMP

This section describes how to create PB MPtMP for the DMFE_4_L2.

To create PB MPtMP:

1. In the BG-30 NE shelf view window, select DMFE_4_L2 > Switch in the left object tree. Then select the VSI List tab under the Services working mode.

Page 186: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-102 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

2. Click the Create VSI button in the toolbar. The Create VSI window opens.

3. To create PB MPtMP, select PB MPtMP from the Service Type dropdown

list.

4. Select the VSI State by selecting the radio button. When disabled, all policers block their traffic, including NNI ports. When enabled, all policers enable traffic flow. This field is editable with no constraints. The default is Enabled.

5. Enter the VSI ID, User Label, Customer, S-VLAN and BSC Threshold values as required in the left areas of the window.

6. The vFIB Quota can only be set for a PB MPtMP. When this quota is reached, the learning process can be halted, in which case flooding is performed (when the Switch Quota is forwarded), or unknown addresses are dropped (when the action is dropped).

7. Select the Enable MAC Address Learning checkbox if needed. You can also input additional description into the VSI Description field.

Page 187: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-103

8. In the right Objects Selections area, you can select the ETY ports and EoS ports as you want in the relevant list. Right-click an object to deselect, or you can select an object in the lower-right list and click in the toolbar.

You can click in the toolbar to create a policer.

Page 188: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-104 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

9. All selected VSI UNI or E-NNI ports have the same Ethernet priority, which is determined by the provider CoS mapping policy. This mapping is defined in the UNI Ingress CoS Mapping, E-NNI Ingress CoS Mapping, and E-NNI Egress CoS Priority Swapping fields in the Create VSI window. Click "+" to expand the UNI port and can enlarge the lower-right area by click the icon above the toolbar, as shown below.

The following apply when defining the CoS mapping:

For each priority (0 to 7), only one provider CoS should be selected. The default is CoS0 for all priorities.

All priority values should be mapped. The priority value of untagged frames is defined in the UNI port

attributes. Any change that conflicts with an already defined policer or that is set

with No Rate Limit is rejected. A CoS can only be removed or discarded from the mapping when it is

not associated with No Rate Limit or a policer profile. When this occurs, the operation is rejected and the following message is displayed: A policer is associated with this CoS.

10. For the DSCP Mapping area, all the UNI/E-NNI ports of the VSI have an option to enable the same DSCP to provider CoS mapping policy. The DSCP to CoS mapping can be disabled and enabled. The default is disabled.

Page 189: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-105

11. In the Tag Type & C-VIDs field, select the Specific C-VIDs checkbox and define the C-VID range. Also, select the Untagged, Priority Tagged, and Tag Translation checkboxes if needed. Here for this port, Untagged and Priority Tagged have been used in PB PtP and are not available for PB MPtMP.

Select in the toolbar, the following window opens.

Page 190: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-106 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Use this window to add, move, delete tags, or delete groups by selecting the corresponding radio button.

12. Click Active to create and activate the PB PtP. If you click Save, the PB

MPtMP will be saved but not activated. To activate it, select the Recent Saved VSIs tab.

13. Select the VSI you want to activate in this window and click Active. The

PB MPtMP is then activated.

Page 191: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-107

Using the VSI List

The VSI list enables you to view and manage VSI items.

To use the VSI list:

1. You can view the VSI list in the following window:

2. To activate a VSI, select a VSI in the list and click in the toolbar. Click to deactivate it.

3. To enable a VSI, select a VSI in the list and click in the toolbar. Click to disable it.

Page 192: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-108 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

4. To Edit a VSI, select the VSI in the list and select the Edit VSI button in the toolbar, the Edit VSI window opens.

Modify the VSI as required, and click Apply to save the settings.

5. To view the details of a VSI, select the VSI and click in the toolbar. The View VSI window opens.

Page 193: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-109

6. To delete a VSI, select the VSI in the list and click in the toolbar. To delete all of the VSIs in the list, click the Select All button and then

click . Click to deselect all.

7. To upload VSIs, click the VSI Upload button in the toolbar. The VSI Upload window opens, as shown below.

Click Upload to upload VSIs from the MESW_6F card.

The status bar shows the consistency status between the NE and the database. If the NE and the database are inconsistent, select the VSI Compare tab to display the inconsistency results.

Click Save To DB to send the data from the NE to database, or click Delete from DB to delete the data from database.

Page 194: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-110 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

8. You can also access some operations from the right-click menu, as shown below.

Executing the VSI performance

This section describes how to execute the VSI performance, including:

Current Performance

Recent Performance

History Performance

TCA Threshold

Monitor and Report

Reset Performance Counters

Policer performance can also be performed, including:

Current Performance

Recent Performance

History Performance

Monitor and Report

Reset Performance Counters

Page 195: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-111

To perform the VSI performance:

1. In the VSI list, select a VSI and right-click on it. From the pop-up menu, select VSI Performance.

2. To view the current performance of the selected VSI, select VSI

Performance > Current Performance.

Page 196: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-112 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Click to retrieve the information to view.

3. To view the recent performance of the selected VSI, select VSI Performance > Recent Performance.

Click to retrieve the information to view.

4. To view the historical performance of the selected VSI, select VSI Performance > History Performance.

Page 197: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-113

5. To set threshold of the selected VSI, select VSI Performance > Threshold Setting.

Click to retrieve the information to view.

6. To set monitoring and reporting, select VSI Performance > Monitoring and Reporting.

From this window, you can set whether to monitor and auto-report the VSI.

7. To reset the performance counters, select VSI Performance > Reset Performance Counters.

Page 198: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-114 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Managing VSI Alarms

This section describes how to manage the VSI alarms, including:

Current

History

Mask

To manage VSI alarms:

1. In the VSI list, select a VSI and right-click on it. From the pop-up menu, select VSI Alarm.

Page 199: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-115

2. To view current alarms, select VSI Alarm > Current.

3. To view historical alarms, select VSI Alarm > History.

Click to retrieve the information to view.

Page 200: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-116 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

4. To mask the alarms of the selected VSI, select VSI Alarm > Monitoring and Reporting.

DMFX_4_L2 The DMFX_4_L2 is a Layer 2 data card with 4 x 100Base-FX that can be inserted into any BG-30B Tslot. The only difference between the DMFX_4_L2 card and the DMFE_4_L2 (on page 7-75) card is that the DMFX_4_L2 card has four SFP blocks.

The DMFX_4_L2 card also supports MPLS services.

For the details of MPLS services, refer to the chapter Managing MPLS Services (on page 8-1).

Page 201: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-117

DMGE_2_L2 The DMGE_2_L2 is supported in both the ADM-1/4, ADM-16 and 4 x ADM-1/4 systems, and can be assigned to any Tslot in BG-30B. When it works in ADM-1/4, the ESSI rate is 622M and when it works in ADM-16 or 4 x ADM-1/4, the ESSI rate is 2.5G.

Main features of the DMGE_2_L2 are list as follows:

2 x GbE interfaces in LAN side based on SFP modules.

64 x EoS interfaces in WAN side with total traffic bandwidth up to 2.5G.

Configurable ESSI rate: 2.5Gb/s or 622Mb/s, depending on XIO30 type.

No local XC capability. When working with the ADM1/4 system, dynamic bandwidth adjustment will result in traffic-hit. A user confirmation is required in such a case, or Bandwidth compression is not supported.

Traffic and timing signals connect to both XIO cards. Support the switching between two XIO cards with ACT signals from two XIO cards.

The DMGE_2_L2 Layer 2 functionality is the same as the DMFE_4_L2 (on page 7-75) but with higher capacity and larger throughput.

The DMGE_2_L2 card also supports MPLS services.

For the details of MPLS services, refer to the chapter Managing MPLS Services (on page 8-1).

MPS_6F The BG_20B with an MPS_6F card on the L12 module is called the BG-20B_L2M. The MPS_6F card is the same as the DMFE_4_L2 (on page 7-75) card, except for the number of the LAN ports.

MPS_6F includes the following main function blocks:

6 x FE PHY

EoS ports located on MXC-20

FE PHY located on MXC-20

The MPS_6F card also supports MPLS services.

For the details of MPLS services, refer to the chapter Managing MPLS Services (on page 8-1).

Page 202: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-118 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

MPS_4F MPS_4F is a Layer 2 data card in BG-20C. The traffic functionality (including EOS, ETY and Switch) of MPS_4F is mostly the same as MPS_6F (on page 7-117), except that MPS_4F has four FE ETY ports while MPS_6F has six.

The MPS_4F provides:

8 x EoS ports

8 x EoS objects

4 x ETY ports

1 x Switch object

FE_L12 The Fast Ethernet Module (FE_L12) is a multi-EoS Ethernet interface card providing up to eight EoS channels. The total bandwidth of the eight EoSs cannot exceed 63 VC-12s, and the EoS encapsulation protocol is optional.

Externally, eight 10BaseT/100BaseT Ethernet transparent transmission interfaces can be provided. Internally, an eight-port L2 switching module is integrated, which supports the L2 switching function through an external cable connection.

The functional blocks contained in the FE_L12 card include eight VCGs, eight EoSs, and 16 ports. The port involves two layers: MAC and PHY. VCG is the collection of VC-12s or VC-3s. The specific number of VC-12s or VC-3s depends on the VCG’s virtual cascade mode and maximum traffic.

Page 203: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-119

Managing Ports

This section describes how to configure the FE_L12 card attributes.

To configure FE_L12 card attributes:

1. In a BG-40 NE shelf view window, select the FE_L12 card in the left object tree. In the General tab under Configuration working mode, you can view the general information of the FE_L12.

Page 204: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-120 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

2. To configure the ETY port attribute, select the ETY Ports tab in the above window.

3. To configure the EoS encapsulation protocol and the EoS port attribute

settings, select the EoS Ports tab in the window.

Page 205: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-121

4. To perform VCG configuration, in the left object tree, right-click on the FE_L12 card or an EoS port. In the pop-up menu, select Create VCG. The VCG Attribute window opens.

Use this window to configure the virtual cascade mode (VC-12/VC-3), the bandwidth of each VCG, and the LCAS attributes.

Page 206: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-122 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

5. To add or remove a VCG member, select the VCG in the object tree, and then select the Configuration working mode.

For every member of this VCG, a Deactivated attribute can be set. this entails removing the member from the VCG.

6. To view real-time traffic, select the FE_L12 card in the left object tree. Then select the EoS Current Payload Rate tab under the Maintenance working mode.

Page 207: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-123

In this window, you acquire the Rx and Tx traffic of EoS ports (ports 1 through to 8). The traffic here refers to the average traffic within the first 15 minutes in the acquisition process.

For the acquired traffic information, the data display unit is specified in bps.

7. To perform loopback maintenance, select the Loopback tab under the Maintenance working mode.

The Loopback Type values are Terminal Loopback and No Loopback. The default is No Loopback.

Set the Loopback Type for each VCG in this window. Click Apply to save the configuration in the database and the NE.

Page 208: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-124 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

8. To perform MST maintenance, select a VCG in the left object tree and then select the Maintenance working mode.

For LCAS members, the MST FAIL force/release function can be performed. MST Attribute values are Auto and Force Fail. The default is Auto.

Configuring the VLAN

A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) is a logical network topology. It logically divides the network into several broadcast domains. The packets can only transmit inside the VLAN. Communication between VLANs is through a Layer 3 routing switch.

A VLAN can reduce the broadcast domain by segmenting the network efficiently. It optimizes network performance and security, and is easy to manage.

The FE_L12 supports two types of VLAN: a port-based VLAN and a TAG-based VLAN. TAG is defined in IEEE 802.1q. It adds a tag in the MAC frame header, which contains the priority and VLAN ID of this MAC frame.

Page 209: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-125

FE_L12 VLAN processing rules are:

VLAN processing for an untagged MAC frame at the ingress port.

Untagged MAC frames do not contain VLAN information. When an untagged frame enters a Layer 2 port of the FE_L12 card, the FE_L12 adds a tag to this frame to indicate that this MAC frame belongs to a specific VLAN. The MAC frame then enters the filter and switch processing. The FE_L12 Layer 2 port’s default Port VID determines in which VLAN the untagged MAC frames belong. The Port VID can be configured.

VLAN processing for a tagged MAC frame at the ingress port.

Tagged MAC frames contain VLAN information. When entering the Layer 2 port of the FE_L12, the frame goes to the filter and switch processing directly.

Filter mechanism at the ingress port.

The FE_L12 filter is always enabled at the ingress port. When a MAC frame enters the ingress port, the VLAN ID of the tag is checked. If the port is not a member of the VLAN, the frame is dropped.

The FE_L12 does not support filtering based on the frame type. If an untagged frame enters the ingress port, it is not dropped. A tag is added to the MAC frame to indicate that the frame belongs to the default VLAN of the ingress port. The frame then enters the filter processing.

VLAN processing at the egress port.

VLAN processing at the egress port has two options when a MAC frame belonging to a specific VLAN exits the Layer 2 port of the FE_L12 card: tagged or untagged. This can be configured. If the VLAN information is not needed when the MAC frame exits a specific member port, this member port is configured as Untagged. This occurs when the VLAN member port is connected to the LAN. If the VLAN information is still needed when the MAC frame exits a specific member port, this member port can be configured as Tagged. This occurs when the VLAN crosses several switches.

A Layer 2 port of the FE_L12 card can be a tagged member port of several VLANs, but cannot be an untagged member port of multiple VLANs. For example, a port can be the tagged member port of VLAN 100 and VLAN 200, and the untagged member port of VLAN 300. However, this port cannot be the untagged member port of VLAN 400 at the same time.

Static VLAN table and current VLAN table.

The FE_L12 supports manual VLAN configuration. Manually configured VLANs are static VLANs. The Static VLAN table is a subset of the current VLAN table. In addition to Static VLANs, the current VLAN table also contains VLANs dynamically registered through GVRP. As the network grows, the VLAN configuration can be applied to the entire network through GVRP, without having to manually configure all the switches.

Page 210: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-126 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

To configure the VLAN:

1. In the BG-40 NE shelf view window, select FE_L12 > Switch in the left object tree. Then select the Services working mode.

2. To create a VLAN, in the above VLAN List tab window, click Create. A

Create window opens.

3. Input the VLANID and VLAN Name. 4. Add the member ports by selecting ports in the VLAN Port area. 5. Define the untagged member ports in the Untagged Port area. 6. Click OK to create the VLAN. 7. To edit or delete a VLAN, select the VLAN to be edited or deleted in the

VLAN list. Then click Edit or Delete.

Page 211: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-127

To configure a port’s default VLAN ID:

In the BG-40 NE shelf view window, select FE_L12 > Switch in the left object tree. Then select the Port VID tab under the Services working mode.

The FE_L12 card’s port PVID (default VLAN ID) does not need configuration. When the port is an untagged member port of a specific VLAN, the port PVID is set to the ID of the VLAN. This PVID cannot be changed. When the port is a tagged member port of one or several VLANs and is not an untagged member port of any VLAN, the port PVID must be configured.

Page 212: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-128 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Configuring the vFIB

The FE_L12 Filter Database (vFIB) table length is 4K. vFIB-related operations include configuring the Aging Time, flushing the vFIB, configuring the Static vFIB table, and configuring the Port Lock.

The FE_L12 Layer 2 module has a dynamic address-learning function. All the dynamically learned addresses need aging.

The following considerations apply to the aging process:

When an address is learned dynamically, the aging timer is started.

If the address can be learned during the Aging Time, it is removed from the vFIB.

The Aging Time is the initial value for the aging timer.

If no aging mechanism is used, the vFIB may contain many invalid addresses.

User can configure the aging time of FE_L12 in the following window:

The default value for the aging time is 336 seconds. The step value for setting the aging time is 21 seconds.

For details about configuring the vFIB, refer to Configuring the vFIB (on page 7-70) of the MESW_6F.

Page 213: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-129

ESW_2G_8F/ESW_2G_8F_E ESW_2G_8F cards placed in the BG-40/BG-20 chassis can operate as either a provider’s core (P) RS or a provider’s edge (PE) RS, in order to implement a BG-based provider network. The customer’s edge (CE) RS and the customer’s LAN are outside the scope of this document.

A BG-based provider network, based on the P and PE RSs and the connecting EoS links, functions as an Ethernet (Reference: IEEE 802.3) virtual-bridged local area network (Reference: IEEE 802.1Q) using 802.1Q/P encapsulation (VLAN tags) and a switching/bridging algorithm (Reference: IEEE 802.1D).

The Layer 1/SDH topology of the network is transparent to the Layer 2/Ethernet. Either a ring or mesh topology of SDH trails accommodates point-to-point links in a switched Ethernet network. The same Layer 1 network can accommodate multiple Layer 2 networks using separate SDH paths. The basic rate of an EoS connection uses VC-12/VC-3 granularity, meaning N x 2 Mbps or N x 50 Mbps.

The ESW_2G_8F provides three types of ports:

2 x ETY GE ports

8 x ETY ports

16 x EoS ports

The ESW_2G_8F is a front-access card containing the following interfaces:

Two GE interfaces (SFP)

Eight ETY interfaces (RJ-45)

An LED indicator for the ESW_2G_8F card: Alarm/Active/Fail

An LED indicator for the ports: LINK/RX/SPEED

When the ESW_2G_8F card is reused in the BG-20E shelf, it is called the ESW_2G_8F_E. Both of these cards actually have the same PCB, but a different assembly. From a management perspective, the ESW_2G_8F_E is a new card type with an independent type ID. It has no relationship to the ESW_2G_8F.

The ESW_2G_8F/ESW_2G_8F_E card has the same feature as the MESW_6F card, which is a daughter card of BG-20B. For more details about ESW_2G_8F/ESW_2G_8F_E card operation, refer to the sections in this manual relating to the MESW_6F (on page 7-39).

Page 214: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-130 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

ME_2G_4F ME_2G_4F is a Dslot module for BG-20B_L1, BG-20B_L2 and BG-20B_L2M. It supports two GE ports and four FE ports (two optical and two electrical), L2 functionality with MPLS and PB capability.

The ME_2G_4F provides 4 types of ports:

4 x VC-4 WAN bandwidth and 64 x EoS channel

2 x GbE interface (Combo)

2 x 10/100Base-T interface (Copper)

2 x 100Base-FX interface (Optical)

ME_2G_4F can only be assigned in BG-20B when INF-20BH is assigned, with larger power output.

ME_2G_4F can load software or FPGA version from MXC-20 in both boot status and running status. FPGA load is done by local CPU and reset is required after FPGA is loaded. Only cold reset is supported.

The XC model of ME_2G_4F is same as ESW_2G_8F_E, so XC calculation and allocation mechanism is the same.

ME_2G_4F supports both PB and MPLS functionalities, all L2 features are synchronized with DMGE_2_L2 (on page 7-117) in BG-30B.

MPS_2G_8F MPS_2G_8F is substitute of ESW_2G_8F_E, with richer features and capability. It is a L2 data expansion card with 2 x GBE and 8 x 10/100Base-T interfaces and at least 16 EoS WANs. Both provider bridge and MPLS are supported in MPS_2G_8F.

MPS_2G_8F has 64 EoS ports and 2 GBE COMBO & 8 FE Ethernet LAN ports. It has a local XC, supporting VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 cross-connect, so it can support time-slot re-allocation (in order to save VC-4) without affecting traffic. The XC is the same as ESW_2G_8F_E.

MPS_2G_8F L1 and L2 functionality is similar as DMGE_2_L2 (on page 7-117) except that it has 8 FE ports.

Page 215: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-131

EoP Cards There are three EoP cards: the MEOP_4, the MEOP_4H, and the DMEOP_4. This section describes these cards.

MEOP_4/MEOP_4H The MEOP_4 is a Dslot module for the BG-20B, which provides Ethernet-over-PDH (EoP) functionality. This module provides 4 x 10/100BaseT interfaces on the LAN side, 4 x EoP channels on the WAN side, and L1 conversion between each LAN interface and WAN interface. The total bandwidth on the WAN side is up to 32 x E1s.

Attribute management for the MEOP_4 card includes:

Configuration management: VCG configuration Adding or removing a VCG member EoP encapsulation protocol configuration Port attribute configuration

Fault management: Current alarms Historical alarms Alarm configuration

Performance management: Current performance Historical performance Performance threshold

Maintenance: Real-time traffic view Loopback Force link down

The MEOP_4H has the same functionality as the MEOP_4. It supports hot-insertion.

Page 216: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-132 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

To configure MEOP_4 card attribute:

1. In a BG-20 NE shelf view window, select the MEOP_4 card in the left object tree. In the General tab under Configuration working mode, you can view the general information of the MEOP_4.

2. To configure the EoP encapsulation protocol, select the EoP Ports tab in the

above window.

Page 217: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-133

This window contains the EoP Protocol information and General information. Set the parameters as required and click Apply to save your changes.

3. To perform VCG configuration, in the left object tree, right-click on the MEOP_4 card or an EoP port. In the pop-up menu, select Create VCG. The VCG Attribute window opens.

Use this window to configure the virtual cascade mode (E1), and bandwidth of each VCG.

Page 218: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-134 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

4. To add or remove a VCG member, select the VCG in the object tree, and then select the Configuration working mode.

For every member of this VCG, the E1s can be deactivated from this VCG.

5. To view real-time traffic, select the MEOP_4 card in the left object tree. Then select the EoP Current Payload Rate tab under the Maintenance working mode.

Page 219: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-135

In this window, you acquire the Rx and Tx traffic of EoP and FE ports (ports 1 through 4). The traffic here refers to the average traffic within the first 15 minutes in the acquisition process.

For the acquired traffic information, the data display unit is specified in bps.

6. To perform loopback maintenance, select the Loopback tab under the Maintenance working mode.

The Loopback Type values are Terminal Loopback, Facility Loopback, and No Loopback. The default is No Loopback.

DMEOP_4 The DMEOP_4 can be inserted into any Tslot in the BG-30B. It is very similar to the MEOP_4 (see "MEOP_4/MEOP_4H" on page 7-131) module for the BG-20B Dslot, except for backplane interface. It has:

2 ESSI bus: one connected to XIO30 A, another connected to XIO30 B.

The same redundancy design as the BG-30B module, like the PME1_21.

Page 220: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-136 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

PCM Cards This section describes how to access, assign, and configure the SM10 and the SM_10E cards.

SM10 Card

SM10 Card Overview The SM10 card is an external BG-40 PCM card that comprises eight E1 interfaces with LIU and framing, and a 512 x 512 DS-0 cross-connection matrix with full-capacity hardware-based CAS processing, timing, and control and communication functions of the system.

Supported Modules The SM10 supports three common traffic module slots, as well as a special small traffic module slot for Ethernet interfaces.

The following table lists the modules supported by the SM10 card. SM10 traffic modules

Name Description

SM_FXO_8 Eight foreign exchange office (FXO) or RD channels SM_FXS_8 Eight foreign exchange stations (FXS) or FXD channels SM_V24_8 Eight V.24 channels SM_EM_24W6 Six 2W or 4W E&M channels SM_V24 Can be configured with one synchronous, two asynchronous, or

eight transparent V.24 channels SM_V24_D Supports point-to-multipoint operation SM_V35_2 Two V.35 channels SM_Omnicentor Supports the central side of an Omnibus type of service (OW on

PDH) SM_Codir_4 Quad-port 64 K codirectional G.703 interface module for the

SM10 card SM_FE_A Two 10/100BaseT channels (the bandwidth of each channel can

be E1 or N x 64 Kbps)

Page 221: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-137

SM10 Slot Assignment This section describes the slot assignment for the SM10.

To perform slot assignment for the SM10:

1. In a BG-40 NE shelf view window, select the SM10 card in the left object tree. Then select the SubCards tab under the Configuration working mode.

2. Click in the toolbar to open the Slot Assignment window.

Page 222: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-138 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

3. Right-click on the sub slot that you want to assign. In the right menu, click Add and select a card to assign.

4. Click Apply to save your assignment.

5. Click Get Logical Card to get the expected configuration from database. Click Get Physical Card to get the actual configuration from the equipment. If you want to set the physical cards as logical cards, click Set As Logical.

SM_10E Card

SM_10E Card Overview The SM_10E card is a PCM card for BG-20 and BG-30 NEs. The card has the following features:

Multiservice access through multiple daughter modules

Nonblocking DS-0 1280 x 1280 crossing matrix

44 E1s mapper/demapper

32 E1s framer

12 Mbps traffic bandwidth for each module slot; traffic add-and-drop capacity up to 24 Mbps

622 Mbps ESSI bus access to MXC20

Fully loaded 40 W power consumption

Page 223: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-139

Dimensions: Base card:

Size (height): 25.4 mm Size (width): 265 mm Size (depth): 210 mm

Module: Size (height): 20.0 mm Size (width): 67.4 mm Size (depth): 154 mm

Front-access connectors

Supported Modules There are three module slots in the SM_10E, each with a capacity of 12 Mbps. These can accommodate the interface modules described in the following table. SM_10E traffic modules

Name Description

SM_FXO_8E Eight-channel FXO access module SM_FXS_8E Eight-channel FXS access module SM_EM_24W_6E

Six channels E&M signaling; six-channel 2/4 VF access module

SM_V24E Configurable V.24 data access module that supports the following three modes:

Eight transparent-only V.24 Four Asynchronous with full controls V.24 Two Synchronous with full controls V.24 that support

point-to-multipoint SM_V35E Two-channel V.35 data access module SM_Omni_E Omnibus central unit with external 2 x 24W interfaces SM_Codir_4E Four-channel 64 K codirectional data access module SM_EOP Two FE channels over E1 with a total WAN bandwidth of 8 x

E1s SM_V35U_E V.35 module support V.35 over unframed E1 and P2MP SM_V35_V11 V.35 module support V.35 over P2MP

Page 224: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-140 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

SM_10E Slot Assignment This section describes the slot assignment for the SM_10E.

To perform slot assignment for SM_10E:

1. In a BG-20/BG-30 NE shelf view window, select the SM_10E card in the left object tree. Then select the SubCards tab under the Configuration working mode.

2. Click in the toolbar to open the Slot Assignment window.

Page 225: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-141

3. Right-click on the sub slot that you want to assign. In the right menu, click Add and select a card to assign.

4. Click Apply to save your assignment.

5. Click Get Logical Card to get the expected configuration from database. Click Get Physical Card to get the actual configuration from the equipment. If you want to set the physical cards as logical cards, click Set As Logical.

Page 226: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-142 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Control Cards This section describes the control cards.

MXC4X The MXC4X is the cross-connect, timing, and control units of the BG-40.

To view the MXC4X card:

1. In a BG-40 NE shelf view window, in the left object tree, select Control and Physical Object > MXC4X. Then select the Configuration working mode. The description of the MXC4X card is shown in the General tab in the following figure.

2. Click in the toolbar to retrieve the information from NE equipment.

Page 227: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-143

MXC20 The MXC20 is the control card of the BG-20, including cross-connect matrix, control unit, and other functions.

To view the MXC20 card:

1. In a BG-20 NE shelf view window, in the left object tree, select Control and Physical Object > MXC. Then select the Configuration working mode. The description of the MXC20 card is shown in the General tab in the following figure.

2. Click in the toolbar to retrieve the information from NE equipment.

Page 228: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-144 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

MCP30 The MCP30 is the control unit of the BG-30 NE. Its main functions are to provide management for the BG-30, and to provide an external management interface. The MCP30 integrates the Control Unit (CU), Overhead Process unit, NVM, real-time clock, and clear channel.

MCP30 provides the following functions:

1. Main control: by a CPU and its peripheral, it controls the whole BG-30 system as well as other blocks in the MCP30. The MCP30 should directly control FPGAs and ASICs in all BG-30B cards (except the Ethernet L2 card).

2. Communication processing: provides the communication between the EMS/LCT and an NE, between an NE and another NE, and between an MCP30 and other cards in BG-30.

3. Overhead processing: provides the overhead processing for the whole BG-30 system, including overhead bytes XC and accessing.

4. T3/T4 interface: including the LIU for 1 T3 2MHz and 1 T4 2MHz interface, LIU and Framer for 1 T3 2Mbit/s and 1 T4 2Mbit/s interface.

The BG-30 supports a pluggable NMV card, which saves the embedded software, FPGA, and configuration data, except for the boot. The NVM card is a Secure Digital (SD) type card. All NE configuration data is stored on the NVM card. The system retrieves NE data from the NVM card after a reset. NE replacement is implemented by inserting the NVM card into a new BG-30. No other actions are required.

NOTE: SD-type NVM should be ordered according to the embedded software version. The SD is always delivered with the appropriate software on it.

Page 229: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-145

To manage the MCP30 card:

1. In a BG-30 NE shelf view window, in the left object tree, select Control and Physical Object > MCP30. Then select the Configuration working mode. The description of the MCP30 card is shown in the General tab in the following figure.

Page 230: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-146 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

2. To set the VC12 objects, select Control and Physical Object > MCP30 in the object tree and then select the TTI and TSL tab under the Configuration working mode.

3. When XIO30 is assigned as XIO30Q_1&4, only the Unframed Clear

Channel mode is supported, as shown in the following window.

Page 231: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Configuring and Managing Cards

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-147

From this window, the VC-12 can be set to following modes:

Framed Clear Channel--Standard Framed Clear Channel--BG-40 2nd Channel Compatible Unframed Clear Channel

Power Units This section describes the power units.

The BG-40 NE has two power supply modes:

INF_4X-DC: Power Filter Unit (-48 VDC)

AC_CONV-4X: Power Conversion Unit (220 VAC)

When fully configured, the maximum power consumption of the BG-40 equipment is 110 W.

The INF/AC_CONV is the power module for the BG-20 NE. Power consumption: 60 W for BG-20B and 150 W for BG-20E.

There is a new INF-20B type: INF-20BH with larger power output to meet the assignment of ME_2G_4F.

The BG-30 NE's power units are as follows:

INF-30B/INF-30E: Single input DC power supply module with input filtering and a fan power supply.

AC_CONV-30B/AC_CONV-30E: Single input AC power supply card, with AC-to-(-48 V) converter and fan power supply.

INF-64 is the DC power supply with input filtering in BG-64. It supports 1+1 with analog protection for -48V and Fan PS and one INF-64 can serve the power supply for the whole BG-64 shelf. INF-64 can provide 48V power for all cards in BG-64. The Maximum Power Consumption of BG-64 supported by INF-64 is 360W.

Page 232: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Configuring and Managing Cards LCT-BGF User Manual

7-148 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Fan Control Units

Setting the Fan Work Mode The LCT-BGF can manage the NE fan’s work mode. Fan work modes are:

Force Open: The user starts the fan manually.

Temperature Auto Control: The fan is controlled by the temperature sensor.

When the temperature exceeds the threshold, the fan starts.

To access the Fan Status window:

1. In an NE shelf view window, select the fan unit under Control and Physical Object in the left object tree. Then select the Status tab under the Configuration working mode.

2. Modify the fan work mode for the NE as required.

3. Click Apply to save your settings.

4. Click in the toolbar to retrieve the information to view.

Page 233: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-1

In this chapter: Overview .......................................................................................................... 8-1Workflow ......................................................................................................... 8-3Supported cards ............................................................................................... 8-3Managing Tunnels ........................................................................................... 8-4Creating MPLS Services ................................................................................ 8-43Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) ........................................................ 8-76Configuring ACL Profile ............................................................................... 8-94Fast ReRoute (FRR)....................................................................................... 8-96

Overview This section describes the Multi Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) services.

8 Managing MPLS Services

Page 234: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-2 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

A label is assigned for an IP packet at the MPLS edge router (LER: Label Edge Router-PE) when the IP packet entering the MPLS network and the MPLS core network routers (LSR: Label Switching Router-P) make forwarding decisions based on the label. The MPLS has a Control Plane and a Data Plane, as shown in the following figure:

The Control Plane is responsible for the establishment and maintenance of correct label binding information among routers; the Data Plane uses label information carried in the packets, and label binding information maintained by the LSR, to forward the packet.

The value of the MPLS is in Traffic Engineering. The major goal of the MPLS Traffic Engineering (MPLS-TE) system is to facilitate efficient and reliable network operations while simultaneously optimizing network resource utilization and performance. The MPLS-TE reduces the overall cost of operations by efficient use of bandwidth resources and provides the QoS.

An MPLS network consists of MoT links, MPS PEs with MPLS NNI ports, and MPLS tunnels.

Page 235: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-3

Workflow The procedure for creating Ethernet Services over an MPLS can be performed as below:

Define the Configuration Mode as MPLS.

Assign PE ID and MPLS Network ID. Each MPS requires a unique PE ID.

Configure ports as MoT port type. MPS support hybrid of PB ports with MPLS ports. You should set the port type as MoT for P2P tunnels.

Set the VCG attribute. In the Create VCGs window, configure the VCG bandwidth.

Create required tunnels.

Select ports and remote PEs for the services.

Set the other required attributes for the services.

Supported Cards There are six Layer 2 data cards in the MPLS services:

MPS_4F

MPS_6F

DMFE_4_L2

DMFX_4_L2

DMGE_2_L2

MPS_2G_8F

ME_2G_4F

The MPLS support five types of Ethernet Services:

MPLS P2P

MPLS MP2MP

MPLS RootedMP/Leaf

MPLS RootedMP/Root

MPLS BPDU Tunneling

The MPLS RootedMP/Leaf and MPLS RootedMP/Root can only be supported in DMGE_2_L2.

Page 236: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-4 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Managing Tunnels This section describes the tunnels in the MPLS network.

Overview A tunnel is composed of tunnel segments. Each tunnel segment is associated with a single MPS card.

The tunnel model is shown in the following figure:

A tunnel segment is subdivided to in-segment CTP and out-segment(s) CTP objects that are interconnected by a single cross-connect (XC) object:

In-segment CTP is analogous to [Ingress I/F, MPLS Label].

Out-segment CTP is analogous to [Egress I/F, MPLS Label].

Cross-connect (XC or SNC) describe the conceptual connection between one in-segment and one or more out-segments, where multiple out-segments can exist in point-to-multipoint (P2MP) tunnel segment.

Both P2P and P2MP tunnel XCs are supported in EMS-BGF.

P2P Tunnel: a tunnel originates at the source PE, traverses through Transit Ps, and terminates at the destination PE.

Page 237: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-5

The following figure illustrates the Point-to-Point (P2P) tunnel:

The source PE pushes two MPLS labels into each customer's Ethernet

packet entering the tunnel. The inner MPLS label is called VC-label, which represents the VPN to which the packet belongs. The VC label serves as demultiplexor field. The outer MPLS label is called Tunnel label, and represents the tunnel to which the packet is mapped to.

The transit Ps simply swap the MPLS packets from (InPort, InLabel) to (OutPort, OutLabel). For MPS, there is no tunnel label swap along the path.

The destination PE determines that it is the destination of the tunnel based on the Tunnel label, and finds out the VPN of the packet based on the VC label. It then looks up the MAC of the packet to find out the destination Ethernet port, pops out the two MPLS labels, and forwards the packet to the CE port or ports.

P2MP Tunnel: a point-to-multipoint (P2MP) tunnel at an LSR is modeled as in-segment and out-segment(s) interconnected by a cross-connect (XC).

The following figure shows the P2MP tunnel model:

Page 238: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-6 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

The in-segment is analogous to [Ingress I/F, MPLS Label], and contains parameters such as CoS. Head in-segment (ingress PE) has no I/F and label.

The out-segment is analogous to [Egress I/F, MPLS Label], and contains parameters such as bandwidth. Tail out-segment (egress PE) has no I/F and label.

The cross-connect (XC) is analogous to [Tunnel ID], and contains parameters such as ingress PE, and also contains a list of attributes per sub-tunnel where each sub-tunnel is analogous to [Tunnel ID, Egress PE].

Sub-tunnel: A P2MP tunnel is constructed from sub-tunnels. Each sub-tunnel starts at same source PE and ends at a different destination PE. Sub-tunnels may share a branch, in which case the data plane forwards only one packet copy to that link.

For sub-tunnels belonging to a same P2MP tunnel XC:

They share the common properties of the branch tunnel, such as In-Segment object. When adding sub-tunnels to the P2MP tunnel XC, these properties are read-only.

Each sub-tunnel has one Out-Segment connects to a unique remote PE. When adding a sub-tunnel, user is required to configure the Out-Segment:

Select an out MoT port. User can change the label.

Sub-Tunnels can share the Out-Segment. The link between this transit PE and the next hop (NH) become the shared branch.

Sub-Tunnels may share the By-Pass tunnel.

Tail Sub-Tunnel: Transit PEs contain many sub-tunnels but only one tail sub-tunnel. Tail sub-tunnel terminated at this PE.

For P2MP Transit&Tail PE, user can configure only one tail sub-tunnel for the tunnel XC.

A Transit&Tail PE can be configured without tail sub-tunnel. Tail sub-tunnel does connect to any MoT port. When configuring the

tail sub-tunnel, user just need mark the P2MP XC has a tail sub-tunnel.

Page 239: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-7

Workflow To create a P2P tunnel XC, use the following steps orderly:

1. Define the Configuration Mode as MPLS.

2. Assign PE ID and MPLS Network ID. Each MPLS requires a unique PE ID.

3. Configure ports as MoT port type. MPLS supports a hybrid of PB ports with MPLS ports. You should set the port type as MoT for P2P tunnels.

4. Set the VCG attribute. In the Create VCGs window, configure the VCG bandwidth.

5. To define a Destination PE or Source PE: Be sure that there is at least one another MPLS switch object that has the same MPLS Network ID as the switch that you are configuring.

6. Create a tunnel XC for the selected MoT port. In the Create Tunnel XC window, the following parameters can be configured:

Input the XC Name, Customer, CoS and Bandwidth. Select the XC Role as one of the following values:

Head. Configure the Out-Segment: set MPLS Out Label, select one of the MoT ports as the Out Port, and select a Destination PE.

Tail. Configure the In-Segment: MPLS In Label, In Port, and Source PE.

Transit. Configure both the In-Segment and Out-Segment: MPLS In Label, MPLS Out Label, In Port and Out Port. There is no Label Swap for MPLS, so the MPLS In Label and MPLS Out Label should be same.

Configure the Protection Type. A tunnel XC can be configured as: Unprotected. Bypass. Protected.

7. Configure other advanced parameters, such as: Enable Tunnel OAM

To create sub-tunnel:

1. Create the P2MP XC, the XC role can be Head or Transit&Tail.

2. The Head tunnel XC need not configure the In-Segment.

3. The Transit&Tail XC need configure the In-Segment, which is shared by the sub-tunnels.

4. For Head tunnel XC, user can add the sub-tunnel to it.

Page 240: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-8 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

5. For Transit&Tail XC, user can add sub-tunnel to it or edit it as a tail sub-tunnel.

6. For MoT port, the Out Label on all of the sub-tunnel should be same.

7. The Adding sub-tunnel window displays the common properties of the sub-tunnels as read-only. User need configure the below:

The remote PE. The Out-Segment connects the remote PE.

Creating Tunnel XCs This section describes the procedure for creating tunnel XCs, including P2P and P2MP tunnel XCs.

Accessing the Create Tunnel XC Window This section describes how to access the Create Tunnel XC window.

To access the Create Tunnel XC window:

1. In the BG-20/BG-20C/BG-30/BG-64 NE shelf view window, select the Switch object under an MPLS card in the left object tree. Then select the General tab under the Configuration working mode.

Page 241: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-9

2. In the above window, set the Switching Mode to MPLS PE. In the MPLS PE Configuration field, assign a PE ID.

Set the other configurations if needed. Click Apply to save your settings.

Page 242: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-10 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

3. Right-click on the MPLS card in the left object tree and select Define MoT Port from the menu. The Define MoT Port window opens.

Page 243: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-11

From the window, set the ports as MoT ports and click Apply.

Page 244: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-12 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

4. To configure the VCG bandwidth, right-click on the MPLS card in the left object tree. The Create VCGs window opens.

Page 245: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-13

5. To define a destination PE or source PE, do the same operation from Step 1 to Step 4 for another MPLS switch object. This switch can be either in another MPLS card or in the same MPLS card (except the MOT port and destination/source PE) with the Switch object that you are configuring, but they must set with the same MPLS Network ID.

6. In the NE shelf view window, select the Switch object in the left object

tree. Then select the Tunnel XC List tab under the Services working mode.

Page 246: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-14 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

7. To create a tunnel XC, select the Create Tunnel XC button in the toolbar. The Create Tunnel XC window opens.

Creating P2P Tunnel XC This section describes the procedure for creating P2P tunnel XC.

To create an unprotected/bypass tunnel XC:

1. To create a P2P tunnel XC, in the Create Tunnel XC window (see "Accessing the Create Tunnel XC Window" on page 8-8), do the following configurations:

Select the Protection Type. A tunnel XC can be configured as: Unprotected or Bypass.

Select PtP as XC Type. Select the XC Role as one of the below values: Head, Transit or Tail.

Head. Configure the Out-Segment: set MPLS Out Label, select one of the MoT ports as the Out Port, and select a Destination PE.

Tail. Configure the In-Segment: MPLS In Label, In Port, and Source PE.

Transit. Configure both the In-Segment and Out-Segment: MPLS In Label, MPLS Out Label, In Port and Out Port. There's no Label Swap for MPS, so the MPLS In Label and MPLS Out Label should be same.

Page 247: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-15

Input the XC Name, XC ID, Customer, CoS and Bandwidth. Select the Enable Tunnel OAM checkboxes if needed.

2. For Transit and Tail of a Bypass tunnel XC, user can also configure the

DualFRR. Select the DualFRR checkbox if needed.

Page 248: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-16 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

3. Click Save to save the tunnel to the Recent Saved XCs area. Or click Activate to save and activate the XC.

4. To activate a tunnel XC, select the tunnel XC in the Recent Saved XCs list

and click Activate All.

Page 249: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-17

To create a protected tunnel XC:

1. To create a protected tunnel XC, select an unprotected head /unprotected transit /unprotected transit&tail tunnel XC tunnel XC from the Tunnel XC List tab window.

2. Select the Add/Remove ByPass Tunnel XC button in the toolbar. The Add Bypass XC window opens.

Page 250: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-18 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

3. The SubTunnel Select field lists the entire bypass tunnel XCs that protect the selected Out Port with the same CoS with the configuring bypass XC. Select an XC from the Select Bypass Tunnel XC list, set the NNH Out Label value if needed and click Add Bypass.

To remove the bypass tunnel XC, select the bypass XC you want to remove in the Recent Saved Bypass XCs list, and click Remove Bypass.

4. Close the Add Bypass XC window. You can view the protected tunnel XC and its bypass tunnel XC highlighted in the list.

Page 251: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-19

5. To remove the bypass tunnel XC of a protected tunnel XC, select the protected tunnel XC in the Tunnel XC List and click .

6. In the Recent Saved Bypass XCs area, select the bypass XC you want to

remove and click Remove Bypass.

Creating P2MP Tunnel XC This section describes the procedure for creating P2MP tunnel XC. A P2MP tunnel is constructed from sub-tunnels. Each sub-tunnel starts at same source PE and ends at a different destination PE. Sub-tunnels may share a branch, in which case the data plane forwards only one packet copy to that link.

In EMS-BGF v11, only DMGE_2_L2 supports creating P2MP tunnel XC. NE Name PE ID

a 3 b 4 c 2 d 1

Page 252: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-20 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

To create the P2MP tunnel XC:

1. Create P2MP tunnel XC for a, as shown below. PE3 is the head PE.

In the Create Tunnel XC window:

Select Unprotected as Protection Type. Select PtMP as XC Type. In the XC Role list, select Head. Select port and destination PE in the Select Port and Select

Destination PE lists. Set the MPLS Out Label. In the MPLS XC Information field, set XC ID, Customer and XC

Name as needed. Click AddBypass. The sub-tunnel is added into the Sub Tunnel list. When you finish adding the sub-tunnel, click Save to save the tunnel

XC to the Recent Saved XCs list. Or click Activate to activate the tunnel XC.

To activate the saved XCs in the Recent Saved XCs list, click Activate All.

Page 253: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-21

2. Create P2MP tunnel XC for d, as shown below.

In the Create Tunnel XC window:

Select Unprotected as Protection Type. Select PtMP as XC Type. In the XC Role list, select Transit&Tail. Enable Add Local Tail by selecting the checkbox before it. Select In Port, Out Port and Destination PE in the corresponding

lists. Set the MPLS In Label and MPLS Out Label. In the MPLS XC Information field, set XC ID, Customer and XC

Name as needed. Click Add Subtunnel. The sub-tunnel is added into the Sub Tunnel

list. In the Sub Tunnel list, you can enable the DualFRR for sub-tunnels as

needed by selecting the checkboxes of DualFRR. When you finish adding the sub-tunnel, click Save to save the tunnel

XC to the Recent Saved XCs list. Or click Activate to activate the tunnel XC.

To activate the saved XCs in the Recent Saved XCs list, click Activate All.

Page 254: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-22 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

3. Create P2MP tunnel XC for b, as shown below.

In the Create Tunnel XC window of MPS_2G_8F in the BG20-1 NE:

Select Unprotected as Protection Type. Select PtMP as XC Type. In the XC Role list, select Transit&Tail. Enable Add Local Tail by selecting the checkbox before it. Select In Port in the Select In Port list. We don't need to select out

port and destination PE for PE4 in the example module. Set the MPLS In Label. There is no out label for PE4. In the MPLS XC Information field, set XC ID, Customer and XC

Name as needed. Click Save to save the tunnel XC to the Recent Saved XCs list. Or

click Activate to activate the tunnel XC. To activate the saved XCs in the Recent Saved XCs list, click Activate

All.

Page 255: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-23

4. User can view from LightSoft after admitting successfully.

Dual FRR The idea of Dual FRR is to define a bypass tunnel that provides link and node protection concurrently. This bypass tunnel originates at the PLR, drops node-protected traffic at N-MP, and continues to L-MP where it drops link-protected traffic. The behavior at N-MP may be referred to as "Drop & Continue".

Page 256: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-24 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

As illustrated in the figure, P2MP tunnel flows from PE1 (PLR) to PE2 (L-MP), where it splits towards PE3 (N-MP). This P2MP tunnel is protected as follow:

Bypass B1 protects the sub-tunnels to PE2 against the failure of link PE1-PE2 (Link protection).

Bypass B1 protects the sub-tunnels to PE3 against the failure of PE2 (Node protection).

Dual FRR is enabled as follow:

Bypass Dual FRR need by enabled at Transit and Tail, no need for Head:

B1 XC at PE2 (L-MP) and PE3 (N-MP)

P2MP Sub-tunnels Dual FRR need be enabled at Transit&Tail:

Sub-tunnels to PE3/PE5 at Transit&Tail (PE2/PE3)

We have configured the MPLS cards in EMS-BGF for the above module, as shown in the following table.

PE NE Name PE ID

PE1 a 3 PE2 d 1 PE3 b 4 B1 c 2

From Lightsoft, we can view the P2MP tunnel in the example module as below.

From EMS-BGF, we can see the details of the tunnels in the example module as below.

Page 257: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-25

1. Tunnel XC Detail for PE1.

2. Tunnel XC Detail for PE2.

Page 258: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-26 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

3. Tunnel XC Detail for PE3.

Using the Tunnel XC List You can perform the following tunnel XC' s management actions in the tunnel list:

Filter the tunnel list

Activate/Deactivate tunnel XCs

View/Edit/Delete a tunnel XC

Upload tunnel XCs

Export XCs

Tunnel XC WRED profile

Tunnel XC performance, including: Current NE History EMS History Threshold Settings Monitoring and Reporting Reset Performance Counters

Page 259: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-27

Tunnel XC Alarm, including: Current History Monitoring and Reporting

For a head tunnel XC, user can also perform the operation: Tunnel XC OAM State.

To access the tunnel XC list:

In the NE shelf view window, select the MPLS Switch object in the left object tree. Then select the Tunnel XC List tab under the Services working mode.

Page 260: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-28 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Filtering the Tunnel XC List This section describes how to filter the tunnel XC list.

To filter the tunnel XC list:

1. In the tunnel XC list, click + to expand the Filter area.

2. Set the attributes in the area as required.

3. Click to filter the list.

Page 261: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-29

Viewing/Editing/Deleting a Tunnel XC This section describes how to view, edit, or delete a tunnel XC.

To view/edit/delete a tunnel XC:

1. In the tunnel XC list, select a tunnel XC and right-click on it. A menu pops up.

Page 262: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-30 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

2. To view a tunnel XC, select the XC in the list, and then select View Tunnel XC from the pop-up menu. The Tunnel XC Detail window opens.

3. To edit a tunnel XC, select the XC in the list, and then select the Edit

Tunnel XC from the pop-up menu. The Edit Tunnel XC window opens.

Page 263: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-31

4. To delete a tunnel XC, you should first deactivate the XC: Select the XC in the list, and then select the Deactivate Tunnel XC

from the pop-up menu. Select Delete Tunnel XC from the pop-up menu.

You can perform these operations by selecting the tool buttons in the toolbar.

Uploading Tunnel XCs This section describes how to upload tunnel XCs.

To upload tunnel XCs:

1. In the tunnel XC list, select the Upload button in the toolbar. The Tunnel XC Upload window opens.

Page 264: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-32 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

2. Click Upload to upload all the Tunnel XCs. The status bar shows the consistency status between the NE and the database. If the NE and the database are inconsistent, select the Compare Result tab to display the inconsistency results.

3. Click Overwrite to overwrite the database with the NE data.

Page 265: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-33

Exporting Tunnel XCs This section describes how to export tunnel XCs as an XML file.

To export Tunnel XCs:

1. In the tunnel XC list, select a tunnel XC in the list and then click in the toolbar. The following window opens.

2. Click Save to export the selected XC as a XML file.

Page 266: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-34 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Configuring Tunnel XC WRED Profile This section describes how to configure the tunnel XC WRED profile.

To configure tunnel XC WRED profile:

1. In the tunnel XC list, select a tunnel XC and right-click on it. Select Tunnel XC WRED Profile from the pop-up menu. The Tunnel State WRED Profile window opens.

2. Select the State and Mode from the corresponding dropdown list.

3. Click Apply to save your settings.

Page 267: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-35

Performing Tunnel XC Performance This section describes how to perform the tunnel XC performance, including:

Current Performance

Recent Performance

History Performance

TCA Threshold

Monitor and Report

Reset Performance Counters

To perform the tunnel XC performance:

1. In the tunnel XC list, select a tunnel XC and right-click on it. From the pop-up menu, select Tunnel XC Performance.

Page 268: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-36 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

2. To view the current performance of the selected tunnel XC, select Tunnel XC Performance > Current Performance.

Click to retrieve the information to view.

3. To view the recent performance of the selected tunnel XC, select Tunnel XC Performance > Recent Performance.

Click to retrieve the information to view.

Page 269: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-37

4. To view the historical performance of the selected tunnel XC, select Tunnel XC Performance > History Performance.

5. To set threshold of the selected tunnel XC, select Tunnel XC Performance

> Threshold Setting.

Click to retrieve the information to view.

Page 270: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-38 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

6. To set monitoring and reporting, select Tunnel XC Performance > Monitoring and Reporting.

From this window, you can set whether to monitor and auto-report the tunnel XC.

7. To reset the performance counters, select Tunnel XC Performance > Reset Performance Counters. A confirmation window opens prompting you to confirm resetting the PM counters.

Click Yes to confirm.

Page 271: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-39

Managing Tunnel XC Alarms This section describes how to manage the tunnel XC alarms, including:

Current

History

Monitoring and Reporting

To manage tunnel XC alarms:

1. In the tunnel XC list, select a tunnel XC and right-click on it. From the pop-up menu, select Tunnel XC Alarm.

Page 272: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-40 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

2. To view current alarms, select Tunnel Alarm > Current.

3. To view historical alarms, select Tunnel Alarm > History.

Click to retrieve the information to view.

Page 273: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-41

4. To mask the alarms of the selected tunnel XC, select Tunnel Alarm > Monitoring and Reporting.

Page 274: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-42 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Viewing Tunnel XC OAM State For head tunnel XCs, you can also view the tunnel XC OAM state.

To view tunnel XC OAM State:

In the tunnel XC list, select a tunnel XC and right-click on it. Select Tunnel XC OAM State from the menu. The Tunnel XC State window opens.

Page 275: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-43

Creating MPLS Services Once you have created the tunnels, you can create MPLS services, as described in this section.

For the MPS_4F, MPS_6F, DMFE_4_L2, DMFX_4_L2, ME_2G_4F and MPS_2G_8F cards, you can create the following three MPLS services:

MPLS PtP service

MPLS MPtMP service

BPDU Tunneling service

For the DMGE_2_L2 card, you can create the following five MPLS services:

MPLS PtP service

MPLS MPtMP service

MPLS RootedMP/Leaf service

MPLS RootedMP/Root service

MPLS BPDU Tunneling service

Page 276: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-44 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

MPLS PtP Service This section describes how to create an MPLS PtP service.

To create an MPLS PtP service:

1. In an NE shelf view window, in the left object tree, select the Switch object under an MPLS card. Then select the VSI List tab under the Services working mode.

Page 277: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-45

2. Click the Create VSI button in the toolbar. The Create VSI window opens.

3. To create MPLS PtP, select MPLS PtP from the Service Type dropdown

list.

4. Select the VSI State by selecting the radio button. When disabled, all policers block their traffic, including NNI ports. When enabled, all policers enable traffic flow. This field is editable with no constraints. The default is Enabled.

5. Enter the VSI ID, User Label, Customer and S-VLAN values in the left areas of the window and select the Enable PM Collection or Enable Egress Counting checkboxes as needed. You can also input additional description into the VSI Description field.

Page 278: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-46 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

6. In the right Objects Selections area, you can select one port and one remote PE from the relevant list. Right-click an object to deselect, or select an object in the lower-right list and click in the toolbar.

You can click in the toolbar to create a policer.

Page 279: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-47

7. All selected VSI UNI or E-NNI ports have the same Ethernet priority, which is determined by the provider CoS mapping policy. This mapping is defined in the UNI Ingress CoS Mapping, E-NNI Ingress CoS Mapping, and E-NNI Egress CoS Priority Swapping fields in the Create VSI window. Click + to expand the UNI port. You can enlarge the lower-right area by clicking the icon above the toolbar, as shown below.

The following apply when defining the CoS mapping:

For each priority (0 to 7), only one provider CoS should be selected. The default is CoS0 for all priorities.

All priority values should be mapped. The priority value of untagged frames is defined in the UNI port

attributes. Any change that conflicts with an already defined policer, or that is set

with No Rate Limit, is rejected.

A CoS can only be removed or discarded from the mapping when it is not associated with No Rate Limit or a policer profile. When this occurs, the operation is rejected and the following message is displayed: A policer is associated with this CoS.

8. For the DSCP Mapping area, all the UNI/E-NNI ports of the VSI have an option to enable the same DSCP to provider CoS mapping policy. The DSCP to CoS mapping can be disabled and enabled. The default is disabled.

Page 280: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-48 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

9. In the Tag Type & C-VIDs field, select the Specific C-VIDs checkbox and define the C-VID range. Also, select the Untagged, Priority Tagged, and Tag Translation checkboxes if needed.

Select in the toolbar, the following window opens.

Use this window to add, move, delete tags, or delete groups by selecting the corresponding radio button.

Page 281: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-49

10. For the selected Remote PE, select a head tunnel XC that can reach the Remote PE from the CoS drop-down list.

11. Click Active to create and activate the MPLS PtP. If you click Save, the PB

PtP will be saved but not activated. To activate it, select the Recent Saved VSIs tab.

12. Select the VSI you want to activate in this window and click Active. The

MPLS PtP then is activated.

Page 282: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-50 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

MPLS MPtMP Service This section describes how to create an MPLS MPtMP.

To create an MPLS MPtMP service:

1. In the NE shelf view window, select the Switch object in the left object tree, then select the VSI List tab under the Services working mode.

Page 283: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-51

2. Click the Create VSI button in the toolbar. The Create VSI window opens.

3. To create MPLS MPtMP, select MPLS MPtMP from the Service Type

drop-down list.

4. Select the VSI State by selecting the radio button. When disabled, all policers block their traffic, including NNI ports. When enabled, all policers enable traffic flow. This field is editable with no constraints. The default is Enabled.

5. Enter the VSI ID, User Label, Customer, S-VLAN and BSC Threshold values as required in the left areas of the window.

6. The vFIB Quota can only be set for a PB MPtMP. When this quota is reached, the learning process can be halted, in which case flooding is performed (when the Switch Quota is forwarded), or unknown addresses are dropped (when the action is dropped).

7. Select the Enable PM Collection and Enable Egress Counting checkboxes if needed. You can also input additional descriptions into the VSI Description field.

Page 284: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-52 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

8. In the Objects Selections area, you can select the ports and Remote PEs in the relevant list. Right-click an object to deselect, or you can select an object in the lower-right list and click in the toolbar.

You can click in the toolbar to create a policer.

Page 285: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-53

9. All selected VSI UNI or E-NNI ports have the same Ethernet priority, which is determined by the provider CoS mapping policy. This mapping is defined in the UNI Ingress CoS Mapping, E-NNI Ingress CoS Mapping, and E-NNI Egress CoS Priority Swapping fields in the Create VSI window. Click + to expand the UNI port. You can enlarge the lower-right area by clicking above the toolbar, as shown below.

The following apply when defining the CoS mapping:

For each priority (0 to 7), only one provider CoS should be selected. The default is CoS0 for all priorities.

All priority values should be mapped. The priority value of untagged frames is defined in the UNI port

attributes. Any change that conflicts with an already defined policer, or that is set

with No Rate Limit, is rejected. A CoS can only be removed or discarded from the mapping when it is

not associated with No Rate Limit or a policer profile. When this occurs, the operation is rejected and the following message is displayed: A policer is associated with this CoS.

10. For the DSCP Mapping area, all the UNI/E-NNI ports of the VSI have an option to enable the same DSCP to provide CoS mapping policy. The DSCP to CoS mapping can be disabled and enabled. The default is disabled.

Page 286: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-54 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

11. In the Tag Type & C-VIDs field, select the Specific C-VIDs checkbox and define the C-VID range. Also, select the Untagged, Priority Tagged, and Tag Translation checkboxes if needed.

Select in the toolbar. The following window opens.

Use this window to add, move, delete tags, or delete groups by selecting the corresponding radio button.

Page 287: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-55

12. For the selected Remote PEs, select head tunnel XCs that can reach the Remote PEs from the CoS dropdown list.

13. Click Active to create and activate the PB MPtMP. If you click Save, the

MPLS MPtMP will be saved but not activated. To activate it, select the Recent Saved VSIs tab.

14. Select the VSI you want to activate in this window and click Active. The

MPLS MPtMP is then activated.

Page 288: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-56 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

MPLS BPDU Tunneling Service This section describes how to create an MPLS BPDU Tunneling service.

To create an MPLS BPDU Tunneling Service

1. In the BG-30 NE shelf view window, select the Switch object under an MPLS card in the left object tree. Then select the VSI List tab under the Services working mode.

Page 289: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-57

2. Click the Create VSI button in the toolbar. The Create VSI window opens.

3. To create MPLS MPtMP, select MPLS BPDU Tunneling from the Service

Type dropdown list.

4. Select the VSI State by selecting the radio button. When disabled, all policers block their traffic, including NNI ports. When enabled, all policers enable traffic flow. This field is editable with no constraints. The default is enabled.

5. Enter the VSI ID, User Label, Customer, VC Label, and S-VLAN values as required in the left areas of the window.

6. Select the Enable PM Collection and Enable Egress Counting checkboxes if needed. You can also input additional descriptions into the VSI Description field.

Page 290: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-58 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

7. In the Objects Selections area, you can select one port and one Remote PE, or two ports with the same port type. Right-click an object to deselect, or you can select an object in the lower-right list and click in the toolbar.

You can click in the toolbar to create a policer.

Page 291: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-59

8. All selected VSI UNI or E-NNI ports have the same Ethernet priority, which is determined by the provider CoS mapping policy. This mapping is defined in the UNI Ingress CoS Mapping, E-NNI Ingress CoS Mapping, and E-NNI Egress CoS Priority Swapping fields in the Create VSI window. Click "+" to expand the UNI port and can enlarge the lower-right area by click the icon above the toolbar, as shown below.

The following apply when defining the CoS mapping:

For each priority (0 to 7), only one provider CoS should be selected. The default is CoS0 for all priorities.

All priority values should be mapped. The priority value of untagged frames is defined in the UNI port

attributes. Any change that conflicts with an already defined policer or that is set

with No Rate Limit is rejected. A CoS can only be removed or discarded from the mapping when it is

not associated with No Rate Limit or a policer profile. When this occurs, the operation is rejected and the following message is displayed: A policer is associated with this CoS.

9. In the Tag Definitions field, only Untagged can be used for BPDU, so user don't need to select the type of tag.

Page 292: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-60 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

10. For the selected Remote PE, select a head tunnel XC that can reach the Remote PE from the CoS drop-down list.

11. Click Active to create and activate the MPLS BPDU Tunneling. If you

click Save, the MPLS BPDU Tunneling will be saved but not activated. To activate it, select the Recent Saved VSIs tab.

12. Select the VSI you want to activate in this window and click Active. The

MPLS BPDU Tunneling then is activated.

Page 293: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-61

MPLS RootedMP/Leaf Service This section describes how to create an MPLS RootedMP/Leaf. It is only supported for the DMGE_2_L2 card.

To create an MPLS RootedMP/Leaf service:

1. In the BG-30 NE shelf view window, select the Switch object under DMGE_2_L2 card in the left object tree. Then select the VSI List tab under the Services working mode.

Page 294: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-62 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

2. Click the Create VSI button in the toolbar. The Create VSI window opens.

3. To create an MPLS MPtMP, select MPLS RootedMP/Leaf from the

Service Type dropdown list.

4. Select the VSI State by selecting the radio button. When disabled, all policers block their traffic, including NNI ports. When enabled, all policers enable traffic flow. This field is editable with no constraints. The default is enabled.

5. Enter the VSI ID, User Label, Customer, VC Label, S-VLAN, and BSC Threshold values as required in the left areas of the window.

6. Select the Enable PM Collection and Enable Egress Counting checkboxes if needed. You can also input additional descriptions into the VSI Description field.

Page 295: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-63

7. In the Objects Selections area, you can select the ports and, at most, two Remote PEs in the relevant list. Right-click an object to deselect, or you can select an object in the lower-right list and click in the toolbar.

You can click in the toolbar to create a policer.

Page 296: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-64 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

8. All selected VSI UNI or E-NNI ports have the same Ethernet priority, which is determined by the provider CoS mapping policy. This mapping is defined in the UNI Ingress CoS Mapping, E-NNI Ingress CoS Mapping, and E-NNI Egress CoS Priority Swapping fields in the Create VSI window. Click + to expand the UNI port and can enlarge the lower-right area by clicking above the toolbar, as shown below.

The following apply when defining the CoS mapping:

For each priority (0 to 7), only one provider CoS should be selected. The default is CoS0 for all priorities.

All priority values should be mapped. The priority value of untagged frames is defined in the UNI port

attributes. Any change that conflicts with an already defined policer, or that is set

with No Rate Limit, is rejected. A CoS can only be removed or discarded from the mapping when it is

not associated with No Rate Limit or a policer profile. When this occurs, the operation is rejected and the following message is displayed: A policer is associated with this CoS.

9. For the DSCP Mapping area, all the UNI/E-NNI ports of the VSI have an option to enable the same DSCP to provider CoS mapping policy. The DSCP to CoS mapping can be disabled and enabled. The default is disabled.

Page 297: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-65

10. In the Tag Type & C-VIDs field, select the Specific C-VIDs checkbox and define the C-VID range. Also, select the Untagged, Priority Tagged, and Tag Translation checkboxes if needed.

Select in the toolbar, the following window opens.

Use this window to add, move, delete tags, or delete groups by selecting the corresponding radio button.

Page 298: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-66 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

11. For the selected Remote PEs, select head tunnel XCs that can reach the Remote PEs from the CoS drop-down list.

12. Click Active to create and activate the MPLS RootedMP/Leaf. If you click

Save, the MPLS RootedMP/Leaf will be saved but not activated. To activate it, select the Recent Saved VSIs tab.

13. Select the VSI you want to activate in this window and click Active. The

MPLS RootedMP/Leaf then is activated.

Page 299: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-67

MPLS RootedMP/Root Service This section describes how to create an MPLS RootedMP/Root. It is only supported for the DMGE_2_L2 card.

To create an MPLS RootedMP/Root service:

1. In the BG-30 NE shelf view window, select the Switch object under DMGE_2_L2 card in the left object tree. Then select the VSI List tab under the Services working mode.

Page 300: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-68 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

2. Click the Create VSI button in the toolbar. The Create VSI window opens.

3. To create an MPLS MPtMP, select MPLS RootedMP/Root from the

Service Type dropdown list.

4. Select the VSI State by selecting the radio button. When disabled, all policers block their traffic, including NNI ports. When enabled, all policers enable traffic flow. This field is editable with no constraints. The default is enabled.

5. Enter the VSI ID, User Label, Customer, VC Label, S-VLAN, and BSC Threshold values as required in the left areas of the window.

6. Select the Enable PM Collection and Enable Egress Counting checkboxes if needed. You can also input additional descriptions into the VSI Description field.

7. In the Objects Selections area, you can select the ports and Remote PEs in the relevant list. Right-click an object to deselect, or you can select an object in the lower-right list and click in the toolbar.

Page 301: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-69

8. Select a P2MP head Tunnel that you have created in the Select P2MP Head Tunnel list.

You can click in the toolbar to create a policer.

9. All selected VSI UNI or E-NNI ports have the same Ethernet priority, which is determined by the provider CoS mapping policy. This mapping is defined in the UNI Ingress CoS Mapping, E-NNI Ingress CoS Mapping, and E-NNI Egress CoS Priority Swapping fields in the Create VSI window. Click + to expand the UNI port and can enlarge the lower-right area by clicking above the toolbar, as shown below.

Page 302: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-70 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

The following apply when defining the CoS mapping:

For each priority (0 to 7), only one provider CoS should be selected. The default is CoS0 for all priorities.

All priority values should be mapped. The priority value of untagged frames is defined in the UNI port

attributes. Any change that conflicts with an already defined policer, or that is set

with No Rate Limit, is rejected. A CoS can only be removed or discarded from the mapping when it is

not associated with No Rate Limit or a policer profile. When this occurs, the operation is rejected and the following message is displayed: A policer is associated with this CoS.

10. For the DSCP Mapping area, all the UNI/E-NNI ports of the VSI have an option to enable the same DSCP to provider CoS mapping policy. The DSCP to CoS mapping can be disabled and enabled. The default is disabled.

11. In the Tag Type & C-VIDs field, select the Specific C-VIDs checkbox and define the C-VID range. Also, select the Untagged, Priority Tagged, and Tag Translation checkboxes if needed.

Page 303: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-71

Select in the toolbar, the following window opens.

Use this window to add, move, delete tags, or delete groups by selecting the corresponding radio button.

12. For the selected Remote PEs, select head tunnel XCs that can reach the Remote PEs from the CoS drop-down list.

Page 304: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-72 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

13. Click Active to create and activate the MPLS RootedMP/Root. If you click Save, the MPLS RootedMP/Root will be saved but not activated. To activate it, select the Recent Saved VSIs tab.

14. Select the VSI you want to activate in this window and click Active. The

MPLS RootedMP/Root then is activated.

Page 305: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-73

Using the MPLS VSI List Management for the MPLS VSI list is the same as for the PB VSI list.

For details about using the MPLS VSI list, refer to the DMFE_4_L2's Using the VSI List (on page 7-107).

Managing Multicast Configuration for MPLS RootedMP/Leaf Service For the MPLS RootedMP/Leaf services, user can perform VSI multicast configuration.

To manage multicast configuration:

1. In the NE shelf view window, select DMGE_2_L2 > Switch in the left object tree. Then select the Services working mode, the VSI list is displayed as shown in the following window.

Page 306: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-74 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

2. Select a VSI with the type: MPLS_RootedMPLeaf in the list and right-click on it, from the pop-up menu, select VSI Multicast Configuration. The Edit/View Multicast Parameters window opens.

3. In the Multicast Configuration tab, in the General Parameters field, you

can set Enable IGMP or Disable IGMP by selecting the relevant radio button.

When Enable IGMP is selected, you can set the parameters for Membership Interval and LQMT Interval. The range for Membership Interval is 60- 1023 seconds. The default is 260 sec.

When Disable IGMP is selected, you can select the Flood All Groups checkbox.

Page 307: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-75

4. Input the IP multicast address in the Add/Remove Address field and click Add.

5. Click Apply to finish the configuration.

6. To edit or view the multicast configuration, select the VSI in the VSI List and right-click on it. The Edit/View Multicast Parameters window opens.

Page 308: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-76 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

7. To view the multicast status, select the Multicast Status tab in the window.

Connectivity Fault Management (CFM)

This section describes the Connectivity Fault Management (CFM).

Overview The goal of Ethernet OAM is to allow service providers to manage each customer service instance individually. Ethernet OAM defines proactive and diagnostic fault localization procedures for point-to-point and multipoint services that span one or more links. It is end-to-end within an Ethernet network. Ethernet OAM functions for Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) allow detection, verification, localization and notification of different defect conditions.

Ethernet CFM relies on a functional model consisting of hierarchical Maintenance Domains (MD). An MD is an administrative domain for the purpose of managing and administering a network. An MD is assigned a unique MD level (among eight possible) by the administrator, which is useful for defining the hierarchical relationship of domains. Maintenance domains may nest or touch, but cannot intersect. If two domains nest, the outer domain must have a higher maintenance level than the one it contains.

A Maintenance Domain is defined by provisioning which switch/router ports are interior to the Domain.

Page 309: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-77

In addition, Maintenance End Points (MEP) are designated on the edge ports for that domain for each EVC, and Maintenance Intermediate Points (MIP) are designated on relevant interior ports.

The demarcation of these maintenance points is left to the discretion of the administrator, based on what points in the network are of relevance.

The following figure shows the Multi-domain Ethernet Service OAM:

The service network in the above figure is partitioned into customer, provider, and operator maintenance levels. The ETH Layer consists of customer service Ethernet frames that may include both customer VLAN tags and provider.

The following terms are used to describe the entities that are managed:

Maintenance Entity (ME): an entity that requires management.

Maintenance Association (MA) (or Maintenance Entity Group - MEG): a set of MEs that satisfy the following conditions:

MEs in an MA exist in the same administrative domain and have the same ME level.

MEs in an MA belong to the same service provider VLAN (S-VLAN).

MA corresponds to a point-to-point or multipoint Ethernet connection. For a point-to-point Ethernet connection/S-VLAN, an MEG contains a single ME. For a multipoint Ethernet connection, a MEG contains n*(n-1)/2 MEs, where n is the number of Ethernet connection end points.

Maintenance Entity Group End Point (MEP): a maintenance functional entity that is implemented at the ends of a ME. It generates and receives OAM frames. A ME represents a relationship between two MEPs.

Maintenance Entity Group Intermediate Point (MIP): a maintenance functional entity that is located at intermediate points along the end-to-end path where Ethernet frames are bridged to a set of transport links. It reacts and responds to OAM frames. A MIP does not initiate OAM frames and takes no action on the transit ETH flows.

Maintenance Point (MP): one of either MEP or MIP.

Page 310: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-78 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

MD Level: in case MDs are nested, the OAM flow of each MD has to be clearly identifiable and separable from the OAM flows of the other MDs. MD Level in the OAM frame distinguishes between the OAM flows of nested MDs. The MD Level determines the MEPs and MIPs that are interested in the contents of a CFM PDU and through which the frame carrying that CFM PDU is allowed to pass.

Eight MD Levels are available to accommodate different network deployment scenarios. MEG that belongs to specific MD level has a default MEG Level assignment amongst customer, provider, and operator roles is:

Customer role is assigned three MEG Levels: 7, 6, and 5. Provider role is assigned two MEG Levels: 4 and 3. Operator role is assigned three MEG Levels: 2, 1, and 0.

Supported Cards The cards that can support CFM are the Layer 2 data cards in the MPLS services:

MPS_6F

DMFE_4_L2

DMFX_4_L2

DMGE_2_L2

MPS_2G_8F

ME_2G_4F

MPS_4F

Page 311: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-79

Creating CFM MA This section describes how to create MA in EMS-BGF.

To create CFM MA:

1. In an NE shelf view window, in the left object tree, select the Switch object under an MPLS card. Then select the CFM Domain and Level tab under the Configuration working mode.

2. Click in the toolbar to create MD. In the Create CFM Domain window, input Domain Name and then select a level in the Domain Level list. The Domain Name and Domain Level should both be unique. Domain Level is from 0 to 7, so user can create at most 8 MDs.

Click Apply to save the MD.

Page 312: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-80 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

3. Close the Create CFM Domain window, user can view the created MDs from the MD list, as shown below.

User can do the following actions from the MD list:

Click to refresh the MD list, then you can click to overwrite the MD list in the database with the data from equipment.

To delete a MD, select the MD you want to remove and click .

Click to clear the data both in database and equipment.

Page 313: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-81

4. After creating the MDs, user can create CFM MIPs. In the same MPLS card, select a LAN or WAN port of UNI/ENNI/INNI, or LAG port in the left object tree, then select the CFM MIPs tab under Configuration working mode.

5. Click in the toolbar to create MIPs. In the Create CFM MIP window, select a domain you have created in the Domain Name list and then input a MIP ID in the MIP ID area. Select the Enable checkbox if needed.

Click Apply to save the MIP in the CFM MIP list.

Page 314: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-82 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

6. Close the Create CFM MIP window, user can view the created MIPs from the MIP list, as shown below.

7. To edit an MIP, select the MIP you want to edit in the list and select from the toolbar, the Edit CFM MIP window opens. You can enable or disable the MIP from this window.

8. Repeat Step 1 to Step 7 to create Domains and MIPs for another MPLS

card. Only the MPLS cards with the same Domains and MIPs can create MA.

Page 315: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-83

9. To create MA, in the NE shelf view window, in the left object tree, select the Switch object under an MPLS card. Then select the VSI List tab under the Service working mode.

10. Click in the toolbar, the Create VSI window opens. Select a PB service from the Service Type list. Set the VSI Parameters as needed and select the ETY and EoS Ports from the Objects Selections area. Set the parameters for the ports in Tag Type & C-VIDs area.

Page 316: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-84 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

11. Select the CFM MA List tab from the Create VSI window.

12. Click from the toolbar. The Create CFM MA window opens.

Page 317: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-85

In the Create CFM MA window, in the MA Parameter area, select a Domain Name, set the MA Name and enable CCM if needed by selecting the Enable CCM checkbox. In the MEPs area, select local MEPs and remote MEPs from the corresponding lists. The selected MEPs will be saved in the lists below:

Local MEPs: UNI/ENNI ports that have been added in VSI, including LAGs.

Remote MEPs: UNI/ENNI ports under the MPLS card in the NE, including LAGs. User can also add external NE as remote MEPs by inputting MEP ID.

13. In the Local MEP and Remote MEP list, set MEP IDs for the selected ports, as shown below.

Page 318: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-86 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

14. Click Save to save the CFM MA.

Click Save&Close to save the MA and close the create window.

Page 319: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-87

15. In the CFM MA List, to edit an MA, select the MA you want to edit and click from the toolbar. The Edit CFM MA window opens.

To view the detail of an MA, click in the toolbar. The View CFM MA window opens.

To delete an MA, select the MA you want to delete and click . An MA with CCM enabled can't be removed. User can disable the CCM in Edit CFM MA window.

Page 320: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-88 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

16. In the CFM MA List, click Save to save the VSI . Click Activate to save and activate the VSI.

17. To upload an MA, select the VSI in the list and click the MA Upload icon

from the toolbar. The CFM MA Upload window opens. Click Upload to upload all the Tunnel XCs. The status bar shows the consistency status between the NE and the database.

Click Overwrite to overwrite the database with the NE data.

Page 321: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-89

18. If the NE and the database are inconsistent, select the CFM MA Compare tab to display the inconsistency results.

CFM Maintenance Ethernet Service OAM includes the following Management functions:

CCM: Continuity Check OAM messages (CCM) are multicast messages to each MEP in a MA/MEG. All MEPs in MEG receive CCMs, not respond to them but maintain records about the status of other MEPs of the MEG. MIPs are transparent to the CCM messages, as shown in the following figure.

CCM transmission may be enabled or disabled in a MEG. When enabled, MEPs periodically exchange Continuity Check OAM messages (CCM). The Continuity Check Protocol has the following features:

Detect loss of continuity. Detect incorrect network connections:

Unintended connectivity between two MEG (mis-merge) Unintended connectivity within the MEG with an unexpected MEP

Detect other defect conditions: Unexpected MEG Level Unexpected CCM Period

Page 322: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-90 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Loopback: Loopback is a ping-like request/reply protocol. MEPs send Loopback Messages (LBM) to verify connectivity with another MEP or MIP for a specific MA. The target MEP or MIP generates a subsequent Loopback Reply Message (LBR). LBMs / LBRs are used to verify bidirectional connectivity. They are initiated by operator command.

Link Trace: Link Trace Protocol can be used to trace the path to the target

MEP and for fault isolation. MEPs send multicast Link Trace Message (LTM) on a particular MEG to identify adjacency relationships with remote MEPs and MIPs at the same administrative level. The message body of an LTM includes a destination MAC address of a target MEP that terminates the link trace.

When a MIP or MEP receives an LTM, it

Generates a unicast Link Trace Reply (LTR) to the initiating MEP and forwards the LTM to the target MEP destination MAC address if the network element is aware of the target MEP destination MAC address in the LTM frame and associates it with a single egress port.

Otherwise the LTM frame is relayed unchanged to all egress ports associated with the MEG, except for the one it was received at.

This section describes how to perform CFM maintenance functions from the CFM MA list.

Page 323: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-91

To perform CFM maintenance in CFM MA list:

1. In an NE shelf view window, in the left object tree, select the Switch object under an MPLS card. Then select the CFM MA List tab under the Maintenance working mode.

2. To define CCM, select the MA from the list and click from the toolbar. The Define CCM window opens.

Modify the settings in CCM Definitions area. Click Apply & Close to save the changes.

Page 324: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-92 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

3. To perform CFM Loopback maintenance, select an MA from the list and

click in the toolbar. The CFM Loopback Maintenance Operations window opens. In the Operation Definitions area, select Loopback as the operation type you want to perform, then select Local MEP and Destination MIP or MEP from the corresponding list. To select an external NE as destination, input the MAC Address in the Select Destination area and click the button.

4. Click Apply. User can view the results from the Operation Results area.

Page 325: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-93

5. To perform CFM LinkTrace maintenance, select an MA from the list and

click in the toolbar. The CFM Loopback Maintenance Operations window opens. In the Operation Definitions area, select LinkTrace as the operation type you want to perform, then select Local MEP and Destination MIP or MEP from the corresponding list. To select an external NE as destination, input the MAC Address in the Select Destination area and

click the button.

6. Click Start to start the LinkTrace maintenance and user can view the result

in the Operation Results area. Click Stop the LinkTrace progress.

Page 326: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-94 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Configuring ACL Profile Access Control List (ACL) is used for Deny of Service (DoS) prevention.

The ACL profiles can be applied to the UNI or E-NNI ports in MPLS cards.

To configure the ACL profile:

1. In a BG-20/BG-30 NE shelf view window, in the left object tree, select the Switch object under an MPLS card. Then select the ACL Profile tab under the Configuration working mode.

Page 327: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-95

2. Click in the toolbar. The Create/Edit Profile window opens.

3. Enter the Profile ID, Profile Name in the ID and Name area, and select

the ACL Rule by selecting the Permit or Deny radio button. Then enter a MAC Address and click Add.

4. Click to retrieve the information to the list to view.

5. Click to edit a selected ACL profile in the list.

6. Click to delete a selected ACL profile.

Page 328: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-96 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Fast ReRoute (FRR) The MPLS supports a protection mechanism called Fast Reroute (FRR). This protects a tunnel against a failure of a link or node along its path.

With FRR, a backup LSP called a bypass tunnel is pre-established to go around a network link or node failure to a downstream MPS, where its path merges with the path of the protected tunnel. The switching to a bypass tunnel involves pushing a third MPLS tag, called an FRR label, into the packet. This label remains until the bypass tunnel remerges with the path of the protected tunnel, where it is popped out of the packet. The primary advantage of FRR is the speed of repair: thanks to the pre-establishment of the bypass tunnels and the fast physical-layer-based failure detection, FRR can provide sub-50ms switching time; this value is comparable to SDH/SONET protection mechanisms.

With FRR link protection, the MPS upstream from the failure reroutes the protected tunnel traffic to a bypass tunnel that merges with the original tunnel at next hop (NH) MPS. With FRR node protection, the MPS upstream from the failure reroutes the protected tunnel traffic to a bypass tunnel that merges with the original tunnel at next-next-hop (NNH) MPS. In addition, FRR node protection provides protection against link failure. By default, if you require FRR node protection, attempts are made to provide node protection for every MPS along the tunnel path. If this is not possible (as is always the case for the destination PE), attempts are made to provide link protection. Thus, a tunnel may have node protection at some hops and link protection at other hops.

Page 329: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing MPLS Services

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-97

To perform an MPLS port protection switch:

1. In the NE shelf view window, in the left object tree, select a MoT port of an MPLS card. Then select the Maintenance working mode.

2. Select the MPLS port protection switch by selecting the corresponding

radio button.

3. Click Apply to save your settings.

Page 330: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing MPLS Services LCT-BGF User Manual

8-98 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Page 331: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-1

In this chapter: Overview .......................................................................................................... 9-1Workflow ......................................................................................................... 9-1Creating XC ..................................................................................................... 9-2Managing the XC List.................................................................................... 9-18Configuring SNCP Attributes ........................................................................ 9-23

Overview One of the key benefits of SDH technologies is the ability to direct the flow of traffic dynamically, using management software rather than hardware switching. A cross-connection set (XC set, or XCS) is a set of cross-connections with the same ID that form a trail along the network.

The cross-connection (XC) subsystem enables you to cross-connect traffic on equipment. NEs feature an advanced Add/Drop Multiplexer (ADM) architecture.

Workflow This chapter describes the procedure for setting up cross-connects. It contains the following sections:

Creating XC

Managing the XC List

Export and import XC files

9 Managing Cross Connections

Page 332: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing Cross Connections LCT-BGF User Manual

9-2 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Creating XC This section describes how to create XCs.

Creating Server XC This section describes how to create a server XC.

To create a server XC:

1. In the NE shelf view window, select the NE in the left object tree. Then select the XC List tab under the Services working mode.

Page 333: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing Cross Connections

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-3

2. Select the Create XC button in the toolbar. The Create XC window opens.

3. Set the XC type as a server by selecting Server from the XC Type

dropdown list.

4. Select the values of Customer, Rate, XC Template, and Number of XCs from the relevant fields.

5. Select the Create Buddle checkbox, if needed.

Page 334: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing Cross Connections LCT-BGF User Manual

9-4 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

6. Select a source timeslot and a sink timeslot from the corresponding timeslot list.

7. Click Save to save the XC to the Recent Saved XCs area. To activate the

XC, click Activate All.

8. Click Activate to activate the XC immediately.

Page 335: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing Cross Connections

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-5

Creating Service XC This section describes how to create a service XC.

To create a service XC:

1. In the NE shelf view window, select the NE in the left object tree. Then select the XC List tab under the Services working mode.

Page 336: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing Cross Connections LCT-BGF User Manual

9-6 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

2. Select the Create XC button in the toolbar. The Create XC window opens.

3. Set the XC type as service by selecting Service from the XC Type

dropdown list.

4. Select the values of Customer, Rate, XC Template, and Number of XCs from the relevant fields.

5. Select the Create Buddle checkbox, if needed.

Page 337: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing Cross Connections

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-7

6. Select a source timeslot and a sink timeslot from the corresponding timeslot list.

7. Click Save to save the XC to the Recent Saved XCs area. To activate the

XC, click Activate All.

8. Click Activate to activate the XC immediately.

Creating Tunnel XC To create Tunnel XC, which is the data XC, refer to Creating Tunnel XC (on page 8-14) in the MPLS services.

Page 338: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing Cross Connections LCT-BGF User Manual

9-8 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Creating OH XC This section describes how to create an OH XC.

To create an OH XC:

1. In the NE shelf view window, select the NE in the left object tree. Then select the OH XC List tab under the Services working mode.

Page 339: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing Cross Connections

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-9

2. Select the Create XC button in the toolbar. The Create OH XC window opens.

3. Set the direction type by selecting either the Bidirectional or Unidirectional

radio button in the XC Parameters area.

4. Select a start timeslot and an end timeslot from the corresponding timeslot list.

Page 340: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing Cross Connections LCT-BGF User Manual

9-10 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

5. Click Save to save the XC to the Recent Saved XCs area. To activate the XC, click Activate All.

6. Click Activate to activate the XC immediately.

Creating DCC XC This section describes how to create a DCC XC.

To create a DCC XC:

1. In the NE shelf view window, select the NE in the left object tree. Then select the DCC XC List tab under the Services working mode.

Page 341: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing Cross Connections

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-11

2. Select the Create XC button in the toolbar. The Create DCC XC window opens.

3. For DCC XC, only bidirectional XC is supported.

4. Select a start timeslot and an end timeslot from the corresponding timeslot list.

5. Click Save to save the XC to the Recent Saved XCs area. To activate the

XC, click Activate All.

6. Click Activate to activate the XC immediately.

Page 342: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing Cross Connections LCT-BGF User Manual

9-12 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Creating PCM XC This section describes how to create PCM XCs, including the SM10 XC and the SM_10E XC.

Creating SM10 XC This section describes how to create SM10 XCs.

To create an SM10 XC:

1. In a BG-40 NE shelf view window, select the SM10 card in the left object tree. Then select the PCM XC List tab under the Services working mode.

Page 343: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing Cross Connections

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-13

2. Select the Create XC button in the toolbar. The Create PCM XC window opens.

3. In the XC Parameters area, select the rate of the XC from the Rate

dropdown list: 64K 2M

4. Set the XC direction by selecting the corresponding radio button in the Direction field:

Bidirectional Unidirectional Broadcast

5. Select the Buddle checkbox if needed.

Page 344: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing Cross Connections LCT-BGF User Manual

9-14 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

6. Select a source timeslot and a sink timeslot from the corresponding timeslot list.

7. Click Save to save the XC to the Recent Saved XCs area. To activate the

XC, click Activate All.

8. Click Activate to activate the XC immediately.

Page 345: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing Cross Connections

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-15

Creating SM_10E XC This section describes how to create SM_10E XCs.

To create an SM_10E XC:

1. In a BG-20/BG-30 NE shelf view window, select the SM_10E card in the left object tree. Then select the PCM XC List tab under the Services working mode.

Page 346: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing Cross Connections LCT-BGF User Manual

9-16 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

2. Select the Create XC button in the toolbar. The Create PCM XC window opens.

3. In the XC Parameters area, select the rate of the XC from the Rate

dropdown list: 64K 2M

4. Set the XC direction by selecting the corresponding radio button in the Direction field:

Bidirectional Unidirectional Broadcast

5. Select the Buddle checkbox if needed.

Page 347: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing Cross Connections

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-17

6. Select a source timeslot and a sink timeslot from the corresponding timeslot list.

7. Click Save to save the XC to the Recent Saved XCs area. To activate the

XC, click Activate All.

8. Click Activate to activate the XC immediately.

Page 348: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing Cross Connections LCT-BGF User Manual

9-18 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Managing the XC List In the XC list, you can perform the following XC management:

Filter XCs

Activate XCs

Deactivate XCs

Edit a XC

View details of a XC

Upload XCs

Delete XCs

Export XCs

To manage the XC list:

1. The following window shows the server and service XC list window.

Page 349: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing Cross Connections

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-19

2. To filter the XCs, click + to expand the Filter area, as shown in the following figure.

Select the relevant elements in the area and click to filter.

3. To activate an XC, select the XC in the list that you want to activate and click the Activate XC button in the toolbar.

4. To deactivate an XC, select the XC in the list that you want to deactivate and click the Deactivate XC button in the toolbar.

5. Click the Activate All button to activate all XCs in the NE equipment.

6. Click the Deactivate All button to deactivate all XCs in the NE equipment.

7. To perform activating increment of the XCs, select the Activate Increment

button in the toolbar.

Page 350: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing Cross Connections LCT-BGF User Manual

9-20 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

8. To edit a XC, select the XC you want to edit and click the Edit XC button in the toolbar. The Edit XC window opens.

Modify the information of the XC and then click Save/Activate.

9. To view details of an XC, select the XC in the list and click the View XC button in the toolbar. The Trail XC window opens.

Page 351: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing Cross Connections

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-21

10. To upload XCs, select the Upload XCs button in the toolbar.

Page 352: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing Cross Connections LCT-BGF User Manual

9-22 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Click Upload to upload XCs.The status bar shows the consistency status between the NE and the database. If the NE and the database are inconsistent, select the Policer Profile Compare tab to display the inconsistency results.

Click Overwrite to overwrite the database with the NE data.

11. To delete an XC, select the XC you want delete in the list and click in the toolbar.

12. To export XCs, select the XCs you want to export and click in the toolbar. The Save window opens.

Page 353: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Managing Cross Connections

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-23

Configuring SNCP Attributes The LCT-BGF supports SNCP I/N. The default is SNCP N.

To define SNCP attributes:

1. In an NE shelf view window, select an object in the left object tree. Then select the SNCP tab under the Services working mode.

2. Click in the toolbar to obtain the SNCP attribute of the selected double-receive point on the NE side.

3. Set the SNCP attributes for each object.

4. Click Apply to send the SNCP attribute displayed in the list to the NE equipment. When the SNCP attribute is successfully sent, it is saved to the database.

Page 354: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing Cross Connections LCT-BGF User Manual

9-24 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Page 355: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-1

In this chapter: Overview ........................................................................................................ 10-1Workflow ....................................................................................................... 10-2Configuring Fault Management ..................................................................... 10-2Managing Current Alarms ........................................................................... 10-11Managing Unreported Alarms ..................................................................... 10-20Managing NE Alarms Log ........................................................................... 10-22BIT Codes .................................................................................................... 10-24Viewing PPI Status ...................................................................................... 10-25

Overview This section discusses how to use the LCT-BGF for configuring, managing, filtering, and troubleshooting NE alarms.

The equipment provides local alarm display and configuration access facilities in the event of equipment failure, and for maintenance purposes. These displays include LEDs on the front panel of the EMS, which correspond to visual LED indicators on the LCT-BGF screen.

The LCT-BGF provides exceptionally powerful tools for viewing and analyzing alarms, enabling you to optimize alarm-processing operations.

The following five types of alarms are available:

Equipment alarms

Communication alarms

Service quality alarms

Processing error alarm

Environment alarms

10 Fault Management

Page 356: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Fault Management LCT-BGF User Manual

10-2 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Workflow For proper alarm processing, first set up your alarm management

configuration to specify how alarms are to be treated in the system. This stage includes defining severity profiles to assign to objects and configuring audible alarm conditions.

After you have completed alarm management configuration, perform the following operations, in any order, whenever required:

Managing Alarms Using the Alarm Log

Configuring Fault Management A key step in initial system setup involves defining your alarm management configuration.

Fault Setting You can configure fault management through Fault Setting.

To access to the Fault Settings:

1. In the NE shelf view, select on the working mode Fault > Fault Setting.

2. The following window shows the NE shelf view with Fault Setting:

Page 357: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Fault Management

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-3

From this window, there are four tabs under the Fault Setting mode:

NE Settings Monitoring and Reporting External Alarms Severity Settings

NE Settings This section describes how to configure NE settings. For the BG-40 NE, the NE Settings include: NE History Log Setting, and Alarm Hold-Off Time. For the BG-20/BG20C/BG-30/BG-64 NEs, there is an additional AinS Timer setting.

To configure BG-40 NE settings:

1. In the NE shelf view window, select Fault > NE Settings. The following window opens.

2. Modify the NE settings as required and click Apply to save the changes.

3. Click to refresh and retrieve the information of the NE settings.

4. Click to copy the settings from the selected NE to other NEs.

Page 358: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Fault Management LCT-BGF User Manual

10-4 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

The areas of NE settings are described as follow:

NE History Log Settings: Alarm log settings specify the working mode of logs on the NE equipment, and include the log length setting, the log working status, and the processing mode after a log is full. The following terms relate to alarm log settings:

The NE alarm log is a flow record table of alarm events and other events generated in an NE.

The NE History specifies whether the log is currently in use or has been stopped. It has two modes: Enabled and Disabled. Enabled mode means the alarm log keeps collecting events. Disabled mode means the alarm log is no longer in use. The default setting is Disabled.

The Log Size defines the maximum number of records that can be stored in a log on the NE equipment (valid value range: 0 to 1,000). The default is 1,000.

When a log is full, it has two processing modes: Overwrite and Stop. In Overwrite mode, new records replace the oldest records when the log is full. In Stop mode, the alarm log stops collecting events when the log is full. The default setting is Overwrite.

Alarm Hold-Off Time: you can set the hold-off time for alarm generation and clearance, to prevent alarm generation and clearance from being incorrectly reported and to suppress excessively frequent alarm generation and clearance. An alarm’s status change is not validated until the hold-off time has elapsed. The hold-off time is defined by the alarm generation hold-off period and the alarm clearance hold-off period.

For the alarm generation hold-off period, an alarm event is not reported and the current alarm status is not updated until a generated alarm is detected and its alarm status lasts three to 30 seconds. The default is three seconds.

For the alarm clearance hold-off period, any alarm clearance detected is not considered as cleared unless the clearance status lasts three to 30 seconds. The default is three seconds.

Page 359: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Fault Management

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-5

To configure BG-20/BG-20C/BG-30 NE settings:

1. Select the BG-20/BG-20C/BG-30 NE to be configured in the topology view. Then, on the main menu, select Fault > NE Settings. The following window opens.

2. Modify the NE settings as required and click Apply to save the changes.

3. Click to refresh and retrieve the information of the NE settings.

4. Click to copy the settings from the selected NE to other NEs.

In the AinS Timer area, the NEs define two AinS timer ranges from 0 to 1,800 seconds, with a step of one second. The default for Time1 is 10 seconds and Time2 is 180 seconds.

The settings in NE History Log Settings, and Alarm Hold-Off Time areas are performed in the same manner as for the BG-40 NE.

Page 360: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Fault Management LCT-BGF User Manual

10-6 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Monitoring and Reporting In the LCT-BGF, you perform alarm source masking in the Monitoring and Reporting tab.

In some cases, the alarms of some ports and functional blocks are irrelevant to the service. In this case, alarms can be masked to avoid confusing them with the alarms caused by actual faults. Alarms that are masked (shielded) are not monitored and do not affect card and equipment alarm indications (namely, the card-level alarm status and NE-level alarm status). No alarm data is reported or recorded for shielded alarms.

Generally, the following cases use alarm masks:

Many service routes are open, but you are currently using only part of them. Unused service ports will send LOS alarms. In this case, you can mask the alarms of the service ports not used, but configured with routes. Unmask the alarms when necessary to use these service ports.

For some ADM NEs, fiber connections at both optical interfaces are planned. However, in actual engineering, one of the following may apply:

The fiber in one direction is not laid as planned, and only fibers at one optical interface can be provided.

A protection network is planned, but the actual network has no protection due to lack of fiber resources.

In these cases, the fibers at some optical interfaces need to be removed because the signals at some optical interfaces are lost. In such situations, the alarms at the unused optical interface can be masked.

In the LCT-BGF, alarms can be masked for the optical interface, electrical interface, and SDH functional block. Generally, to mask optical interface alarms, all SPI, RS, MS, AU-4, and VC-4 alarms are masked. To mask electrical interface alarms, all VC and PPI alarms are masked.

When the alarms of a certain object are masked, the alarms related to this object in the current alarm database are cleared. After the alarm mask is released, the equipment reports the current alarm. Therefore, the NE equipment for which the alarms have been masked should have no alarm indication.

Page 361: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Fault Management

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-7

To mask (shield) an alarm in the BG-40 NE:

1. In the NE shelf view window, select Fault > Monitoring and Reporting. The following window opens.

2. To set an alarm to be shielded, clear the Monitor attribute checkbox. The

default is checked.

3. Click Apply to send the settings information to the NE equipment.

4. Click to refresh and retrieve the information of the NE settings.

5. Click to copy the settings from the selected NE to other NEs.

Page 362: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Fault Management LCT-BGF User Manual

10-8 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

To configure the settings for the BG-20/BG-20C_L2M/BG-30 NEs:

1. Select a BG-20/BG-20C_L2M/BG-30 NE in the topology view. Then, on the main menu, select Fault > Monitoring and Reporting. The following window opens.

2. Set the attributes for each object as needed and click Apply to save the

changes.

3. Click to refresh and retrieve the information of the NE settings.

4. Click to copy the settings from the selected NE to other NEs.

From this window, you can set three attributes for each object. For the Monitor attribute, the setting is the same as for the BG-40 NE. In the Auto Report attribute, you can select Report or No Report in the pull-down list.

In addition, for the objects with AinS Timer Select attribute, you can select Report, No Report, or Auto Report in the Auto Report attribute. Only when Auto Report is selected, the AinS Timer Select attribute is enabled, which can be selected from Timer1 or Timer2. The default is Timer1.

The AinS attribute applies only on the following interfaces:

PPI

FE LAN

GE LAN

Codirectional

Page 363: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Fault Management

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-9

External Alarms The external alarm interface provides an input/output external alarm. An external alarm interface is used to input external alarms, such as an ambient temperature alarm, smog alarm, door warning, and so on. It can also be used to input an alarm from other equipment, such as PCM equipment, so that the LCT-BGF can manage and indicate various external alarms.

The external alarm interface, as a universal TTL-level input interface, can be defined as required by any user. The output interface can be used to output the control volume (for example, the control relay switch) and to provide alarm output to an external piece of equipment.

To manage External Alarms:

1. In the NE shelf view window, select Fault > External Alarms. The following window opens.

There are two areas in the window: Input Ports and Output Ports.

The Input Port area displays the configuration for the four input ports of the NE. You can assign a name to the port in the Port Name field and specify the upper TTL level representing the alarm status or normal status in the Contacts field. The Output Port tab displays configuration for the three output ports. These ports are: major alarm, minor alarm, and sound alarm. You can set the alarm output switch as on or off.

2. Click Apply to send the configuration data to the equipment and save it in the database.

3. Click to retrieve port information from the equipment.

Click to copy the settings from the selected NE to other NEs.

Page 364: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Fault Management LCT-BGF User Manual

10-10 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Severity Settings This section describes how to configure severity settings.

Each alarm has the following four attributes in the Severity Settings window:

Severity

Report

Alarm Cause

Reason ID

Only the Severity and Report attributes can be configured.

Alarms are categorized into five levels by the Severity attribute:

Mask

Critical

Major

Minor

Warning

To configure the severity settings:

1. In the NE shelf view window, select Fault > Severity Settings. The following window opens.

Page 365: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Fault Management

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-11

2. Set alarm attributes as needed by selecting the relevant Severity attribute in the pull-down list and checkbox in the Report attribute for each alarm title.

3. Click Apply to send the settings information to the NE equipment.

The functions of the icons on the toolbar are listed in the following table. Icons in the Severity Settings window

Icons Description

Refresh-retrieves the information from the equipment.

Set as default-views alarm attribute table information for the NE.

Propagate-copies the settings from the selected NE to other NEs.

Open a profile file-imports a profile file from your computer disk.

Save as a profile file-exports the settings as a profile file.

Managing Current Alarms A current alarm identifies an existing abnormal event caused by a problem in the equipment or the communication line. This section describes how to manage current alarms.

Viewing Current Alarms Current alarms are represented on the screen as LEDs on each NE icon. The color of the LED corresponds to the most severe alarm affecting it.

In the Current Alarms window, you can view a summary of the alarms currently present in EMS, and you can apply user-defined filters to display custom current alarm reports.

Page 366: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Fault Management LCT-BGF User Manual

10-12 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

To view current alarms for a specific NE:

1. In the NE shelf view window, select Fault > Current Alarms in the main menu.

The icons on the alarm toolbar are listed in the following table. Icons on the alarm toolbar

Icons Description

Acknowledges the alarms.

Displays alarm details.

Exports current alarms as an XML file.

Shows the current alarms as a list.

Shows the current alarms as a chart.

Selects all the alarms.

Deselects all the alarms.

Synchronizes the alarms manually.

Refreshes the current alarms list automatically.

Page 367: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Fault Management

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-13

To view current alarms for a specific card:

1. In the NE shelf view window, select Fault > Current Alarms in the main menu.

2. In the opened window, in the left object tree, select the card whose alarm information you want to view.

Page 368: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Fault Management LCT-BGF User Manual

10-14 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

To view current alarms for a specific object:

1. Select an NE in the topology map.

2. Select Fault > Current Alarms in the main menu.

3. In the opened window, in the left object tree, click before the tributary card or port to display all the objects.

4. Select the object whose alarm information you want to view.

Page 369: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Fault Management

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-15

Determining the Cause of an Alarm You can determine the cause of an alarm appearing in the Alarm Details window.

To determine the cause of an alarm:

1. In the Current Alarms window, click a specific alarm. The alarm row is highlighted.

2. On the current alarm toolbar, click the Alarm Details icon to open the Alarm Details window.

You can see from the window the details information of the alarm, including Alarm Cause, NE, Card, Object and so on.

Page 370: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Fault Management LCT-BGF User Manual

10-16 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Filtering Current Alarms You can filter current alarms according to the following three specific types:

Severity

Alarm Type

Acknowledge

To filter current alarms:

1. Click + on the Filter bar to unfold the Filter area, as shown below.

2. Clear the checkbox that you do not want to view in the current alarms

window. By default, all objects are checked.

3. Click the Filter icon at the lower right corner.

Page 371: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Fault Management

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-17

Sorting Current Alarms You can change the default display of the current alarms by sorting them by specific orders.

To sort current alarms:

In the Current Alarms window, click the column heading in the current alarm information list to sort the alarm information based on this column.

Acknowledge Current Alarms Acknowledging an alarm means you are aware of the alarm and will eventually take the necessary steps to deal with it. You can acknowledge alarms singly or grouped.

To acknowledge a current alarm:

In the Current Alarms window, select one or more alarms in the current alarm list and click on the toolbar. Or you can select a current alarm and right-click on it, then click from the menu.

Export Current Alarms to Files You can save the current alarms information as a file.

To export current alarms to files:

In the Current Alarms window, click to save the queried current alarm records as an XML file.

Page 372: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Fault Management LCT-BGF User Manual

10-18 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Viewing a Chart for Current Alarms You can choose to view a chart for current alarms.

To view a chart for current alarms:

In the Current Alarms window, click the icon on the toolbar. A histogram is displayed showing current alarm information by alarm severity. Colored blocks in the histogram represent alarms of different severities.

Page 373: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Fault Management

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-19

Manually Synchronizing Alarms If LCT-BGF alarms and equipment alarms cannot be acknowledged as consistent, the Manually Synchronize Alarm function can be used to ensure consistency between them. This operation refreshes the current alarm on the LCT-BGF side, based on the current alarm on the equipment side.

Manually synchronizing an NE alarm is not affected by the Autoreport attribute.

Two synchronization options are available:

Manually synchronize NE alarm

Manually synchronize card alarm

To manually synchronize an alarm on an NE:

1. In the Current Alarms window, select the NE in the left object tree.

2. Click the green icon on the toolbar. If you synchronize successfully, a message appears as shown below.

Page 374: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Fault Management LCT-BGF User Manual

10-20 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Managing Unreported Alarms This section describes how to manage unreported alarms.

To manage unreported alarms:

1. In the NE shelf view window, select Fault > Unreported Alarms in the main menu. The following window opens.

2. Click in the toolbar to retrieve the information to view.

3. To view the alarms in a list, click the Show as List button in the toolbar.

4. To view the alarms in a chart, click the Show as Chart button in the toolbar.

Page 375: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Fault Management

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-21

5. To view unreported alarm details, select a cleared alarm in the list and click the Alarm Details button in the toolbar.

6. To export the unreported alarms to files, select in the toolbar. The Save

window opens.

Enter a name in the File Name field and click Save to save the file.

7. To delete the unreported alarms records, select the alarms you want to delete in the list and click in the toolbar.

Page 376: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Fault Management LCT-BGF User Manual

10-22 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Managing NE Alarms Log The NE alarm log records the alarm and event information saved in the NE equipment. You can view the NE alarm log to access this alarm and event information. If an NE is disconnected during a certain period, all its alarms and events generated during this period are recorded in the log.

Viewing NE Alarm Log The NE alarm log records the alarm and event information saved in the NE equipment. You can view the NE alarm log to access this alarm and event information. If an NE is disconnected during a certain period, all its alarms and events generated during this period are recorded in the log.

To view NE alarm log records:

1. In the NE shelf view window, select Fault > NE History in the main menu.

2. Click to retrieve NE alarm log records.

Page 377: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Fault Management

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-23

Export NE Alarm Log to Files You can export NE alarm log as an XML file.

To export NE alarm log records to a file:

In the NE History window, click to save the NE alarm log as an XML file.

Page 378: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Fault Management LCT-BGF User Manual

10-24 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

BIT Codes This section describes how to view the Built In Test (BIT) codes.

To view BIT codes:

1. In the NE shelf view window, select a card in the left tree and then select Maintenance > BIT Code in the menu. The BIT Code window opens.

2. Click to retrieve the information.

Page 379: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Fault Management

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-25

Viewing PPI Status The LCT-BGF supports a Get PPI Status feature, which queries a loss of signal on each PDH interface. The PPI status can be used to verify the cable connection status when installing the equipment. The PPI status is obtained directly from the hardware, and is not affected by the alarm filter.

To view the PPI status:

1. Select an E1/E3 card in the object tree list in the NE shelf view window, and then select the Maintenance working mode. In the opened window, select the PPI Status tab on the properties area.

2. The PPI status can be refreshed automatically. Select the Refresh Data

Dynamically checkbox and then enter the refresh interval in the Refresh Interval field. Click Start to refresh the PPI status.

3. Click Stop to terminate the refresh process.

4. Click to refresh the information manually.

Page 380: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Fault Management LCT-BGF User Manual

10-26 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Page 381: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 11-1

In this chapter: Overview ........................................................................................................ 11-1Performance Data .......................................................................................... 11-1Workflow ....................................................................................................... 11-3Viewing Performance Data ............................................................................ 11-3Configuring Performance Attributes.............................................................. 11-7

Overview Performance data reflects the network running quality. This section discusses how to monitor the bit errors for each section, the SDH layers, and the path for evaluating quality of service.

Performance Data Performance data can be viewed for different monitored objects, as follows:

SDH: reflects digital bit stream errors, and the number of transferring packets and errored packages.

Port: reflects Ethernet MAC layer statistics, including the number of received frames of varying length and type, and their error packets.

Ethernet over SDH (EOS): reflects GFP errors, and the number of sent packets and errored packages.

DCC: reflects network traffic errors, and the number of monitored packets and errored packages.

11 Monitoring Performance

Page 382: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Monitoring Performance LCT-BGF User Manual

11-2 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Performance data is divided into the following monitoring periods:

15-minute performance data: Equipment performance data is measured in 15-minute intervals. At the end of each 15 minutes, the value of the 15-minute performance data counter is reported to the LCT-BGF. At the same time, the performance data counter is reset and another round of 15-minute performance statistics starts to accumulate.

24-hour performance data: Equipment performance data is measured in 24-hour intervals. At the end of each 24 hours, the value of the 24-hour performance data counter is reported to the LCT-BGF. At the same time, the counter is reset and another round of 24-hour performance statistics starts to accumulate.

Instant performance data: current values of the 15-minute or 24-hour performance data counters.

Through the analysis of historical performance data in the LCT-BGF, the errors at each SDH section/layer can be conveniently checked. If there are errors in the RS, MS, and VC-4, the typical cause is poor aggregate (card) performance.

Possible causes are:

Low laser power.

High laser power.

Excessive input jitter caused by a poor contact on the optical interface, or a relayless distance of the fiber that is too long.

Performance data can be used as an analytical tool, as follows:

By examining the 15-minute performance data for a given day, you can analyze the equipment performance for that day.

By examining the 24-hour performance for a month, you can analyze the equipment running status for that month.

By examining the 24-hour performance for a year or several years, you can analyze the long-term running of the equipment.

The LCT-BGF provides a performance curve diagram, which visually shows equipment performance changes during a specific period. This mechanism provides a convenient way to analyze the communication link quality over time.

Page 383: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Monitoring Performance

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 11-3

Workflow The LCT-BGF performance functions provide instant monitoring of and regular statistics for the error codes of various SDH section layers and paths. Such data is essential to ensure optimal network performance.

The following performance-related operations can be performed:

Viewing current performance

Viewing recent performance

Setting the performance threshold (on page 11-7)

Setting the performance monitor switch

Reset performance counters (on page 11-14)

Viewing Performance Data The LCT-BGF enables you to view the current, historical, and recent performance of an transmission object for 15-minute or 24-hour time intervals. The performance data is divided into four classes: SDH, Port, EoS, and DCC. When you select a class, the related performance data is displayed. The default is SDH performance data.

Viewing Current Performance Current performance data refers to the present value of the current 15-minute or 24-hour performance data counter.

After you set the refresh interval and click Start Refresh, current performance data is retrieved based on the specified monitoring cycle interval (15-minute or 24-hour).

Page 384: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Monitoring Performance LCT-BGF User Manual

11-4 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

To view current performance data:

1. In the NE shelf view window, in the left object tree, select an object, then select the Performance working mode. In the Current tab, you can view the current performance data.

Before performing operations in this window, select the relevant radio button in the Type and Display fields.

2. Click in the toolbar to retrieve the current performance data from the NE equipment.

3. Select the Refresh data dynamically checkbox and set the Refresh Interval.

4. Click Start Refresh to dynamically observe any performance data changes. Data is refreshed, based on the Refresh Interval you specify.

5. Click Stop Refresh to cancel the refresh operation.

6. Click the List View icon to view the information in a list.

Page 385: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Monitoring Performance

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 11-5

7. Click the Chart View icon to view the information in a chart. In the Filter field, select the object you want to view, the chart type you want to generate, and click Get & Create Chart. The following window displays, showing the chart view of the information.

Page 386: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Monitoring Performance LCT-BGF User Manual

11-6 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Viewing Recent Performance For all functional block performance objects, the NE provides a recent performance register, which is a first-in, first-out (FIFO) queue used to save the latest performance data (meaning, historical performance data) of the NE. There are N (N = 16) recent 15-minute registers and M (M = 6) recent 24-hour registers. When the data collection time of the current register reaches 15 minutes or 24 hours, if the data is valid it is dumped to the recent registers. If the recent registers overflow, the earliest recent data register is overwritten. The LCT-BGF can acquire values stored in the recent 15-minute and 24-hour register.

To view recent performance data:

1. In the NE shelf view window, select an object in the left object tree. Then select the NE History tab under the Performance working mode.

2. Select the relevant Display radio button.

3. Click to obtain and display the performance parameter values stored in the recent performance registers of the NE equipment.

Page 387: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Monitoring Performance

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 11-7

Configuring Performance Attributes

The LCT-BGF enables you to configure the performance attributes, including setting performance thresholds, setting performance monitor switches, and resetting performance counters.

Setting Performance Threshold A performance threshold is the allowable upper limit for performance data when a system works normally. When a performance indicator crosses a threshold, the system generates a corresponding event report. You can obtain and set the performance threshold parameters of a network. Monitored performance indicators are ESs, SESs, BBEs, UASs, FEESs, FESESs, FEBBEs, FEUASs, OFSs, PPJCs, NPJCs and PSCs.

The Performance Type can be specified as either a 15-minute or 24-hour period. See the following table for performance threshold value ranges. Performance threshold value ranges

Performance data and interval

Value

ES (15-minute) 1 to 900 SES (15-minute) 1 to 900 BBE (15-minute) MS and RS: 1 to 16777215

Low-order and high-order: 1 to 65535 UAS (15-minute) 1 to 900 FEES (15-minute) 1 to 900

RS: N/A (Not Available) FESES(15-minute) 1 to 900

RS: N/A FEBBE(15-minute) MS: 1 to 16777215

Low-order and high-order: 1 to 65535 RS: N/A

FEUAS (15-minute) 1 to 900 RS: N/A

OFS (15-minute) RS: 1 to 900 PPJC (15-minute) VC-4, VC-3 and VC-12: 1 to 900 NPJC (15-minute) VC-4, VC-3 and VC-12: 1 to 900 ES (24-hour) 1 to 86400

Page 388: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Monitoring Performance LCT-BGF User Manual

11-8 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Performance data and interval

Value

SES (24-hour) 1 to 86400 BBE (24-hour) MS and RS: 1 to 1610612735

Low-order and high-order: 1 to 6291455 UAS (24-hour) 1 to 86400 FEES (24-hour) 1 to 86400

RS: N/A FESES (24-hour) 1 to 86400

RS: N/A FEBBE (24-hour) MS: 1 to 1610612735

Low-order and high-order: 1 to 6291455 RS: N/A

FEUAS (24-hour) 1 to 86400 RS: N/A

OFS (24-hour) RS: 1 to 86400

PPJC (24-hour) VC-4, VC-3 and VC-12: Any Value

NPJC (24-hour) VC-4, VC-3 and VC-12: Any Value

To set performance thresholds:

1. In the NE shelf view window, select the NE in the left object tree and then select Performance > Performance Settings in the working mode area. In the opened window, select the SDH TCA Threshold tab.

Page 389: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Monitoring Performance

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 11-9

2. Click to display the performance threshold value obtained from an NE.

3. Click to copy the performance threshold value to other NEs.

4. Click Apply to send performance threshold values to the NE, and save them to the database.

5. To set the SD/EXC threshold, select the SD and EXC in the window.

Page 390: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Monitoring Performance LCT-BGF User Manual

11-10 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Setting Performance Monitor Switch This operation enables you to monitor the performance of an NE by setting a main switch for NE performance monitoring, and setting the start and end times for monitoring. The performance object monitoring switch determines whether to monitor the performance of a specific functional block in an NE. The autoreport switch determines whether to allow historical performance data for a specific functional block in an NE to be automatically reported to the LCT-BGF.

The following terms relate to the Performance Monitor Switch operation:

Main switch for NE performance monitoring: determines whether to monitor the performance of an NE. When the NE performance monitoring switch is disabled, the collection of statistics and the monitoring of all performance objects in an NE are terminated. In this case, the LCT-BGF cannot obtain any current performance counters, and the NE does not automatically report any historical performance data. When enabled, the NE performance monitoring switch monitors the performance of an NE between the start time and the end time.

Performance object monitoring switch: determines whether to monitor the performance of a specific functional block in an NE. If the performance monitoring switch of a functional block is disabled, it terminates the collection of statistics and the monitoring of all performance objects within this functional block.

Autoreport switch: determines whether to automatically report to the LCT-BGF, historical performance data for a specific functional block within an NE. If the autoreport switch is enabled, historical performance data of a functional block in an NE is automatically reported to the LCT-BGF. When disabled, performance statistics collection and monitoring are implemented within an NE, but there is no reporting. Therefore, current performance counter values can still be obtained.

Specific functional block: includes RS, MS, VC-4, VC-3, and VC-12.

Page 391: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Monitoring Performance

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 11-11

To set the performance monitoring switch:

1. In the NE shelf view window, select the NE in the left object tree and then select Performance > Performance Settings in the working mode area. In the opened window, select the Monitoring and Reporting tab.

2. Click to obtain object data from the NE equipment.

3. Modify object parameters as required.

4. Click Apply to send settings to a piece of equipment and save them to the database.

5. To set monitoring switch parameters for an NE, select the Schedule tab.

Page 392: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Monitoring Performance LCT-BGF User Manual

11-12 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Viewing Laser Performance Threshold You can view laser performance threshold for an optical port.

To view laser performance threshold:

1. In an NE shelf view window, select an optical port in the left object tree. Then select the Laser Performance tab under Performance working mode.

2. Click in the toolbar to retrieve the parameters.

Page 393: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Monitoring Performance

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 11-13

Managing Threshold Settings This section describes how to manage threshold settings.

To manage threshold settings:

1. In an NE shelf view window, select an Ethernet port in the left object tree. Then select the Threshold Setting tab under Performance > Performance Settings working mode.

2. Set the parameters as needed.

3. Click Apply to save your changes.

4. Click in the toolbar to retrieve the parameters.

5. To copy the settings to other ports, click the Propagate button in the toolbar.

Page 394: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Monitoring Performance LCT-BGF User Manual

11-14 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Reset Performance Counters Use this operation to manually reset the near-term or current performance registers on an NE or object. This operation should not be used until system debugging is in service or the faulty equipment has been restored.

To reset performance counters:

1. In the NE shelf view window, select the NE or a card in the left object tree. Then select Performance > PM Reset Counters in the menu. A confirmation message is displayed.

2. Click Yes to reset the performance counters.

Page 395: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 12-1

In this chapter: Overview ........................................................................................................ 12-1Configuring the LCT-BGF Work Mode ........................................................ 12-2

Overview Only one EMS-BGF and one LCT-BGF are allowed to log in to the same NE simultaneously. Both the EMS-BGF and the LCT-BGF can be in Master mode to configure the NE.

When the LCT-BGF applies for Master mode, the embedded software on the NE checks the LCT configuration of the EMS-BGF, as follows:

If the EMS-BGF is not managing the NE, the LCT-BGF switches to Master mode successfully.

If the EMS-BGF is logged into the NE and the LCT-BGF configuration of the EMS-BGF is approved, the LCT-BGF switches to Master mode successfully.

If the EMS-BGF is logged into the NE and the LCT-BGF configuration of the EMS-BGF is not approved, the LCT-BGF does not switch to Master mode, but remains in the Monitor mode.

If the EMS-BGF is logged into the NE and the LCT-BGF configuration of the EMS-BGF is waiting for approval, the LCT-BGF embedded software on the NE sends an Apply Master notification to the EMS-BGF. If the EMS-BGF returns approval, the LCT-BGF switches to Master mode. If the EMS-BGF returns no approval, the LCT-BGF remains in Monitor mode.

12 Managing LCT-BGF Security

Page 396: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing LCT-BGF Security LCT-BGF User Manual

12-2 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Configuring the LCT-BGF Work Mode

When working with the LCT-BGF, you can view its current work mode and set the work mode as either Master or Monitor mode.

To obtain the LCT-BGF work mode:

In the main menu, select Advance > LCT Work Mode to display the LCT-BGF work modes:

Monitor mode (offline) Master mode (online)

A Message window opens showing the current LCT-BGF work mode.

To set the LCT-BGF work mode as Master:

In the main menu, select Advance > Request Log In as Master to set the LCT-BGF connection status in Master mode.

To set the LCT-BGF work mode as Monitor:

In the main menu, select Advance > Request Log In as Monitor to set the LCT-BGF connection status in Monitor mode.

Page 397: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-1

In this chapter: Overview ........................................................................................................ 13-1Workflow ....................................................................................................... 13-1Preventive Maintenance Operations .............................................................. 13-2Perform Card Maintenance ............................................................................ 13-6MSP 1+1 Maintenance Operation .................................................................. 13-8Managing SNCP Attributes ........................................................................... 13-9Perform Transmission Object Maintenance Operations .............................. 13-10Perform Maintenance on Timing ................................................................. 13-17

Overview This section discusses how to perform routine maintenance operations on the cards and internal objects.

Workflow You can perform the following maintenance operations in any order, whenever required:

Performing card maintenance (on page 13-6)

Performing MSP 1+1 maintenance operation (on page 13-8)

Managing SNCP attributes

Performing transmission object maintenance operation

Performing maintenance on timing (on page 13-17)

13 Performing Maintenance

Operations

Page 398: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Performing Maintenance Operations LCT-BGF User Manual

13-2 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Preventive Maintenance Operations

This section describes how to perform preventive maintenance operations.

Saving NE Configuration Data This operation is only available for the BG-40 NE. You can manually save all configuration data in the BG-40 NE to the flash. Saved data can be used to restore the BG-40 NE when necessary.

To save NE configuration data:

In the BG-40 NE shelf view window, select Maintenance > Save NE configuration in the menu.

Clearing NE Configuration Data This operation restores all configurations within an NE to their initial status by clearing all configuration data in the NE equipment, including NE configuration data and trail information.

To clear NE configuration data:

1. In the NE shelf view window, select Maintenance > Clear NE Configuration Data in the main menu. A confirmation window opens prompting you to confirm clearing the data.

2. Click Yes to confirm.

Page 399: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Performing Maintenance Operations

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-3

Uploading NE Data This section describes how to check the configuration consistency between the LCT-BGF and the equipment. Key configuration data is traffic-affecting data, such as slots, cards, VCGs allocation, XCs, and maintenance.

To upload NE data:

In the NE shelf view window, select Maintenance > Upload NE Data in the menu. The LCT-BGF uploads all the configuration data from the equipment and saves it to the database.

Connectivity Testing This operation sends a ping to the NE equipment, to verify the connection to the NE equipment. The ping checks the connection between a local host and the network by sending one Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) ECHO packet to the host over the network, and subsequently monitoring the returned ECHO REPLY packet. This operation can only be performed at the system operation level.

To perform a connectivity testing:

1. Select an NE in the EMS topology view, and then select Maintenance > Ping in the main menu. The following window opens.

2. Set the size of a ping test packet by entering a numeric value in the

Package Size.

Page 400: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Performing Maintenance Operations LCT-BGF User Manual

13-4 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

3. Click Ping to conduct the ping test. The display shows the returned ping results.

4. Click Stop Pinging to cancel the ping test. The display area shows the ping

statistics.

5. Click Clear Result to clear the contents in the display area.

Performing an LED Test All LEDs within an NE can be tested to verify the quality of the indicator hardware, and to improve the reliability of the alarm indicator indications.

To perform an LED test:

1. In the NE shelf view window, select Maintenance > Test LED in the main menu. A confirmation window opens.

2. Click Yes to perform test operations.

Page 401: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Performing Maintenance Operations

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-5

Preventive Maintenance Procedure The following table describes the preventive maintenance procedures necessary to ensure the proper operation. LCT-BGF preventive maintenance procedures

Procedure How often to perform

Save the NE database configuration to hard disk

Once a week, or following major changes in network topology

Check version correspondence Once a week, or whenever major changes are made to system configuration

Delete old system files Once a week, or following major changes in network topology

Check performance Once a week, or according to working procedures Check LCT-BGF to NE communication

Once a week, or according to working procedures

Save the LCT-BGF configuration to hard disk

Once a week, or following major changes in network topology

Check switching to protection Once a quarter, according to network administrator's instructions Note: This operation is traffic-affecting.

Export cross connections data to XML files

Once per month, or according to working procedures

Check optical parameters Once per month, or according to working procedures

Export topology data to an XML file

Once per month, or according to working procedures

Export card inventory data to an XML file

Once per month, or according to working procedures

Page 402: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Performing Maintenance Operations LCT-BGF User Manual

13-6 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Perform Card Maintenance

Resetting a Card When the physical device of a card does not work normally and needs to be initialized, a Card Reset operation is performed. Both warm and cold resets are available.

A warm reset only resets the central processing unit of the cards, meaning it repositions the running of card usage programs. A cold reset resets both the central processing unit and the peripheral hardware. Warm resets do not affect traffic, while cold resets do.

To reset a card:

1. In the NE shelf view window, select a card in the left object tree, then select Maintenance > Reset in the menu. The Reset NE window opens.

2. Select the Cold reset or Warm reset radio button.

3. Click OK. A confirmation message is displayed after command execution.

Page 403: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Performing Maintenance Operations

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-7

Obtaining the SFP Type The SFP type has two parameters that can be configured:

Expected SFP Type

Application Code

This section describes how to obtain the SFP type.

To obtain the SFP type:

1. In the NE shelf view window, select an oPort in the left object tree and then select the Configuration working mode. The following window opens.

2. Select the required Expected SFP Type and the Application Code in the

respective dropdown lists.

3. Click to retrieve the information to view.

Page 404: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Performing Maintenance Operations LCT-BGF User Manual

13-8 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

MSP 1+1 Maintenance Operation You can perform maintenance operations on objects configured in MSP 1+1.

To perform MSP 1+1 maintenance operations:

1. In the NE shelf view window, select the MSP-Linear tab under the Configuration working mode.

2. Select a PG in the list and right-click on it. From the pop-up menu, MSP

1+1 maintenance operation can be performed as described below: For unidirectional MSP 1+1, you can perform the following

maintenance operations: Delete PG Force Switch to Protection Force Switch to Main Manual Switch to Protection Manual Switch to Main Release

For directional MSP 1+1, you can perform the following maintenance operations:

Delete PG Lockout of Protection Force Switch to Protection Force Switch to Main Release

Page 405: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Performing Maintenance Operations

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-9

Managing SNCP Attributes The LCT-BGF supports SNCP I/N. The default is SNCP N.

To define SNCP attributes:

1. In the NE shelf view window, select the SNCP List tab under the Service working mode.

2. You can set the attributes of Revertive, Monitor Type, and Hold Off

Time in the respective dropdown lists.

3. Select an SNCP in the list and right-click it. From the pop-up menu, the following maintenance operations can be performed:

Force Switch to Protection Force Switch to Main Manual Switch to Protection Manual Switch to Main Release

4. Click Apply to save your settings.

5. Click to refresh the information in the list.

Page 406: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Performing Maintenance Operations LCT-BGF User Manual

13-10 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Perform Transmission Object Maintenance Operations

The LCT-BGF enables you to perform maintenance operations on transmission objects.

Using Maintenance List The LCT-BGF conveniently provides a graphical symbol indicating that a maintenance operation has been performed on an NE. In addition, it also enables you to view a list of the maintenance operations performed on an NE.

Whenever a maintenance operation has been performed on an NE, the Maintenance icon appears above the NE icon in the LCT-BGF main window.

To use the maintenance list:

1. In the NE shelf view, select Maintenance > Maintenance List in the menu. Or in the EMS main window, select an NE and then select Maintenance > Maintenance List in the main menu.

2. Click to refresh the information in the list.

3. To release maintenance operation data, select an operation from the list and

click on the toolbar or right-click on it and select Release in the pop-up menu.

Page 407: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Performing Maintenance Operations

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-11

Performing/Releasing Loopbacks The loopback operation is designed to aid in testing the service path and service interface. In this context, loopback refers to a software loopback, meaning that it is set through the LCT-BGF.

After an end-to-end trail has been configured, a loopback can be used to test whether the whole path works normally and whether meters receive and send consistently. If there is no error code, it means that everything is working normally.

The loopback operation includes:

Terminal (NE) loopback: looping back signals from the cross-connect unit back to the same cross-connect unit. The terminal loopback operation can be used to test the flow of signals in the system.

Facility (FE) loopback: directly looping back signals received by the physical port to the output port corresponding to it, without changing the signal structure. The facility loopback operation can be used to test the connector.

NOTE: The loopback operation is traffic-affecting.

Page 408: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Performing Maintenance Operations LCT-BGF User Manual

13-12 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

To perform a loopback:

1. In the NE shelf view window, from the left object tree, select a card that has undergone maintenance and requires a loopback. Then select the Loopback tab under the Maintenance working mode.

2. Modify loopback parameters as required by selecting a loopback from the

Loopback Type list.

3. Click Apply to save your settings.

4. Click to refresh the information in the list.

Page 409: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Performing Maintenance Operations

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-13

To release a loopback:

1. In the above window, select the Maintenance List tab next to the Loopback tab and click to refresh the data in the list.

2. In the Operation attribute list, you can see the loopback operations you

performed. Select the loopback you want to release and click on the toolbar, or right-click on the loopback and select Release in the pop-up menu.

Page 410: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Performing Maintenance Operations LCT-BGF User Manual

13-14 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Performing AIS/RDI The LCT-BGF enables you to perform the Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) and the Remote Defect Indication (RDI) operation.

To perform an AIS/RDI:

1. In an NE shelf view window, from the left object tree, select the VC-4/VC-3/VC-12 module under all optical interface cards and service cards. Then select the Force Signal tab under the Maintenance working mode.

2. In the DownStream area, select the operation to be performed by selecting

either the None or AIS radio button from the dropdown list.

3. In the UpStream area, you can select None, AIS or RDI from the dropdown list.

4. Click Apply to insert the AIS/RDI.

Page 411: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Performing Maintenance Operations

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-15

Performing PRBS The LCT-BGF enables you to perform the PRBS operation.

To perform a PRBS:

1. In the NE shelf view window, from the left object tree, select the required card and select VC-4 or PPI. Then select the PBRS tab under the Maintenance working mode.

2. In the Generator Side area, you can perform PRBS generation:

Set the Switch mode to On. Specify the Generator Pattern. Select the Invert Signal checkbox. Select the Upstream or Downstream radio button in the Direction

field. Click Apply to generate the PRBS. Click the Add single bit error icon to insert an additional error bit.

3. In the Monitor Side area, you can perform monitoring PRBS: Set the Switch mode to On. Specify the Generator Pattern. Select the Invert Signal checkbox. Select the Upstream or Downstream radio button in the Direction

field. Click Restart to begin monitoring PRBS. The error code is added to the

Counter. Click Refresh to refresh the Counter value.

4. In the toolbar, click to retrieve the current status.

Page 412: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Performing Maintenance Operations LCT-BGF User Manual

13-16 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Switching to Protection The LCT-BGF provides the following options for switching to protection:

Manual Switch: Made only if the protected object has no alarms on it. Manual switch is a persistent command and can be removed only by clearing it. It has a lower priority than alarms, which means that a manual switch returns to the main object if the protected object has an alarm on it.

Force Switch: Switching to protection is made from the active object to the backup object. In this mode, traffic is switched permanently, even if conditions do not require automatic switching.

Lockout: Switching to protection is prevented, even if conditions require automatic switching. Lockout remains in effect until the action is released.

To switch to protection:

1. For the XIO cards, in the NE shelf view window, select the Main XIO card in the left object tree, then select the Maintenance working mode.

Set the protection switch by selecting a mode in the Switch Command area and click Apply to save the setting.

2. For MSP 1+1, you can perform the switching from the right-click menu in the PG list (see "MSP 1+1 Maintenance Operation" on page 13-8).

3. For SNCP, you can perform the switch to protection operation from the right-click menu in the SNCP list.

Page 413: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Performing Maintenance Operations

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-17

Perform Maintenance on Timing This section describes maintenance operations that can be performed on timing objects and TMUs.

Viewing TMU Working Mode You can determine the TMU work mode by querying the current clock working mode and the clock reference of the NE.

The clock working mode can be one of the following:

Capture mode

Tracing mode

Holding mode

Free oscillation mode

To view the TMU working mode for BG-40/BG-20 NE:

1. In the BG-40 NE shelf view window, select MXC4X under Control and Physical Object in the left object tree, and then select the Timing Maintenance tab under the Maintenance working mode. In the BG-20 NE shelf view window, you should select the TMU object under Control and Physical Object, and then select the Timing Maintenance tab under the Maintenance working mode.

2. In the toolbar, click to retrieve the TMU work mode.

Page 414: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Performing Maintenance Operations LCT-BGF User Manual

13-18 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

To view the TMU working mode for BG-30 NE:

1. In the BG-30 NE shelf view window, select the XS A:TMU object under Control and Physical Object, while in BG-20C NE, select TMU. Then select the Timing Maintenance tab under the Maintenance working mode.

From the window, you can view the Main TMU Working Mode and the Standby TMU Working Mode.

2. Click to retrieve the TMU work mode.

Page 415: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Performing Maintenance Operations

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-19

Forcing the Timing Source The LCT-BGF enables you to force a specific timing source, even if the system has made a different selection, based on the quality of the sources and the priorities assigned.

To force the timing source:

1. In the NE shelf view, select the Timing Maintenance tab as described in Viewing TMU Working Mode (on page 13-17).

2. Select an object in the Timing list and right-click on it, as shown in the following figure:

The following operation can be performed form the right-click menu:

Lockout Release Lockout Forced Switch Manual Switch Clear

Page 416: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Performing Maintenance Operations LCT-BGF User Manual

13-20 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Page 417: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 14-1

In this chapter: Overview ........................................................................................................ 14-1Enabling the BG-40 NE Proxy ARP .............................................................. 14-2Configuring the BG-40 NE ARP Table ......................................................... 14-3Displaying Channel MIB Counters ................................................................ 14-5Configuring the BG-40 NE Serial Port .......................................................... 14-6Performing a Software Upgrade for the BG-40/BG-20 ................................. 14-7Performing a Software Upgrade for the BG-30/BG-64 ................................. 14-9Clearing the Flash ........................................................................................ 14-11Configuring the Trap Manager Table .......................................................... 14-12Configuring SNMP Agent Mode ................................................................. 14-14Clearing Reset .............................................................................................. 14-15

Overview This chapter introduces the advanced configuration of the LCT, which provides enhanced configuration options for advanced users.

14 Performing Advanced

Configuration

Page 418: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Performing Advanced Configuration LCT-BGF User Manual

14-2 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Enabling the BG-40 NE Proxy ARP

The Proxy Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) enables a LAN-connected GNE to automatically handle ARP requests for remote non-LAN NEs connected via DCC to the GNE (can be configured in the NE ARP list). The following figure illustrates this concept.

As shown in the figure, when the router R attempts to connect or send a packet to a remote NE (for example, NE2), the router sees that this NE has the same subnet (N1.N2) as the Ethernet that is attached to it and to the GNE. Therefore, the router “incorrectly” assumes that the NE is sitting on the same subnet (the same wire). As a result, the router sends an ARP request to determine the physical address of the NE. The GNE receives this ARP request and sends its own physical (MAC) address to the router. The router then makes the connection or sends the IP packet to the GNE.

Page 419: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Performing Advanced Configuration

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 14-3

To enable the BG-40 NE proxy ARP:

1. In the BG-40 NE shelf view window, select Advanced > Proxy ARP Enable/Disable. The Proxy ARP window opens.

2. Click Get to retrieve the proxy ARP setting from the equipment.

3. Set the proxy ARP property and click Apply to send the proxy ARP to the BG-40 NE.

Configuring the BG-40 NE ARP Table

After enabling a GNE's proxy ARP, you should configure the ARP table. The ARP table contains the NE IP address or the IP subnet for the GNE proxy. When a GNE receives an ARP request for an IP address, it looks up the address in the ARP table. If the ARP table contains this IP address, the GNE returns an ARP acknowledgment.

To configure the BG-40 NE ARP table:

1. In the BG-40 NE shelf view window, select Advanced > Proxy ARP Table. The Proxy ARP Table window opens.

Page 420: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Performing Advanced Configuration LCT-BGF User Manual

14-4 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

2. To add proxy ARP items to the table, click . The Create Proxy ARP window opens.

Enter the IP address and subnet mask in the respective fields and click OK to confirm and return to the Proxy ARP Table window. The

new IP address is displayed in the IP list.

3. To modify the proxy ARP table, click . The Modify Proxy ARP window opens.

Modify the IP address and subnet mask and click OK.

4. To delete proxy ARP items from the table, select their IP addresses and click .

5. To obtain proxy ARP IP addresses from the BG-40 NE, click . The IP addresses are displayed in the window.

6. Click Apply to send the proxy ARP IP addresses to the BG-40 NE.

Page 421: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Performing Advanced Configuration

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 14-5

Displaying Channel MIB Counters

Channel MIB counters show detailed information about the channel communication quality and the position of a channel communication failure. If the channel MIB counters show a channel with many send/receive errors or stop/start times, it indicates that one of the NEs at the ends of the channel has communication problems.

To display channel MIB counters:

1. In BG-40/BG-20 NE shelf view window, select Advanced > Channel MIB Counters. The Channel MIB Counters window opens.

2. Click to display the Channel MIB Counters window, which displays the counters in real time.

Page 422: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Performing Advanced Configuration LCT-BGF User Manual

14-6 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Configuring the BG-40 NE Serial Port

The BG-40 serial port is used to connect external equipment. To connect with external equipment, set the property as External. To manage the PCM card in the extension slot, set the property as Internal. The default is Internal.

To configure the BG-40 NE serial port:

1. In the BG-40 NE shelf view window, select Advanced > Serial Port Configuration. The NE Serial Port Configuration window opens.

2. Click to obtain the serial port from the BG-40 NE in this mode.

3. Click Apply to send the property to the BG-40 NE.

Page 423: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Performing Advanced Configuration

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 14-7

Performing a Software Upgrade for the BG-40/BG-20

The embedded software is the control software on the element cards. The FPGA file is the programmable file supporting hardware on the cards. Embedded software is located in the element’s upper/lower-area memories, whereas the FPGA file is located in the file memory.

NOTE: The Boot Configuration Tool can only upgrade the MXC4X.

To download embedded software:

1. In the BG-40/BG-20 NE shelf view window, select a card and then select Advaced > Download Embedded Software in the main menu. The following window opens.

Page 424: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Performing Advanced Configuration LCT-BGF User Manual

14-8 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

2. Click Get in the Bank Info area to retrieve the embedded software bank information from the equipment.

3. Select the Upper Area or Lower Area radio button in the Bank Activation area. This selection should always be different from the Active Area when reverting back to the original software.

4. Click in the Version Download area to select the file name to be downloaded.

5. Click Download to download the software to the equipment.

To download an FPGA file:

1. Select a card and then select Advanced > Download FPGA Software. The following window opens.

2. Click to select the FPGA filename to be downloaded.

3. Click Download.

Page 425: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Performing Advanced Configuration

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 14-9

Performing a Software Upgrade for the BG-30/BG-64

Software upgrade can only be performed by a system administrator. This section describes how to perform a software upgrade for the BG-30 NE in LCT-BGF.

Before doing this operation, the LCT-BGF automatically checks the FTP server configuration. If no FTP server is installed, the LCT-BGF prompts you to install it. If the FTP service is not running, the LCT-BGF starts this service automatically. If the FTP service cannot be started, the LCT-BGF prompts you to start the service manually.

To perform a software upgrade for the BG-30:

1. In the BG-30 NE shelf view window, select Advanced > Download FPGA Software in the main menu. The Software Upgrade window opens.

2. Click Get to retrieve the embedded software version information from the

equipment and display it in the Version Info area.

Page 426: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Performing Advanced Configuration LCT-BGF User Manual

14-10 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

3. Click to select the file name to be downloaded. Select the Up or Down radio button in the Target Area for the software download location.

4. Click Download to download the software to the equipment.

5. Click Activate to set the activation time.

From this window:

Set the Activation Time attribute with the time displayed in the window.

Click Apply to send the Activation Time/Version Activate attribute to the selected NEs.

Click Activate Immediately to activate the NE new version immediately.

Page 427: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Performing Advanced Configuration

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 14-11

Clearing the Flash The Clear Flash feature deletes the LCT-BGF configuration data from the flash memory. Other areas are not affected.

To clear the flash:

1. In the BG-40/BG-20 NE shelf view window, select Advanced > Clear the Flash. A confirmation window appears.

2. Click Yes to confirm.

Page 428: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Performing Advanced Configuration LCT-BGF User Manual

14-12 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Configuring the Trap Manager Table

SNMP agent can send trap messages to several managers simultaneously. Trap messages contain SDH alarm information.

The administrator can modify the trap manager table using an SNMP Set operation. Only one manager can be specified as the administrator.

To configure the trap manager table:

1. In the BG-20/BG-30/BG-64 NE shelf view window, select Advanced > Trap Manager Table. The Trap Manager Table window opens.

2. Click to add a new trap manager.

Enter values for the Manager IP, Trap Port Number, and Administrator attributes at the top of the window, and click OK. The new trap manager is added to the list of trap managers at the bottom of the window.

Page 429: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Performing Advanced Configuration

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 14-13

3. To edit a trap manager, click from the toolbar. The Edit Proxy ARP window opens.

Modify the settings and click OK to save.

4. To delete a trap manager, select it in the list and click .

5. Click to retrieve the trap managers from the equipment and display their details in the list of trap managers.

6. Click Apply to send the trap managers to the equipment.

Page 430: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Performing Advanced Configuration LCT-BGF User Manual

14-14 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Configuring SNMP Agent Mode SNMP agent has two work modes: monitoring and full-control.

Some managers need a source IP address to identify an agent. BroadGate NEs have two IP addresses: DCC and Ethernet. One of them should be selected.

To configure the SNMP agent mode:

1. In the BG-20/BG-30/BG-64 NE shelf view window, select Advanced > SNMP Agent Mode. The SNMP Agent Mode window opens.

2. Click to obtain the mode option and IP address for SNMP traps. In Monitoring Mode, the SNMP agent only responds to GET, GET-NEXT, and GET-BULK operations. In Full Control Mode, the SNMP agent responds to all operations.

3. Enter the mode option and IP address for the SNMP Traps property by selecting the relevant radio button. Select Ethernet IP when the NE is a gateway. Otherwise, select DCC IP.

4. Click Apply to send the property to the NE.

Page 431: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

LCT-BGF User Manual Performing Advanced Configuration

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 14-15

Clearing Reset When the No Recovery attribute is selected, the NE restarts using the default configuration instead of the current configuration.

To clear reset:

1. In BG-30/BG-20/BG-64 NE shelf view window, select Advanced > Reset No Recovery. The Start Up Option window opens.

2. Select the No Recovery checkbox for the NE to restart using the default

configuration instead of the current configuration. Select the With Recovery checkbox for the NE to restart using the current configuration.

3. Click to retrieve the No Recovery attribute from the equipment.

4. Click Apply to send the No Recovery attribute to the equipment.

Page 432: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Performing Advanced Configuration LCT-BGF User Manual

14-16 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

Page 433: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

426006-2422-113-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 15-1

In this chapter: Overview ........................................................................................................ 15-1License Control Mechanism .......................................................................... 15-1

Overview Each LCT in the network requires license to activate it. This chapter describes the license management in LCT-BGF.

For more information about the management, refer to the documentation <EMS-BGF License Control>.

License Control Mechanism Each LCT in the network requires license to activate it.

To easy the using of LCT, the LCT licensing mechanism is simplified as below:

Each LCT requires a license to activate it.

The LCT license is only bound with the total number of LCT hosts and activated by EMS-BGF.

EMS-BGF maintain LCT license bank, each LCT activation will withdraw one license from the bank.

15 Managing Licenses

Page 434: Eci TelecomBg-30 Bg-20 and Bg-64

Managing Licenses LCT-BGF User Manual

15-2 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2422-113-A00

After installing the LCT, user should connect the LCT host to the EMS. EMS will check the LCT license bank whether there is spared license.

If there is spared license, EMS will activate the LCT license. If there’s no spared license, EMS will refuse to activate the LCT

license.

A temporary license (180 days) is provided to allow user using LCT when there’s no connection to the EMS-BGF.

For the customer that don’t install the EMS-BGF, the following procedure can be performed to manage the LCT license:

Customer run the Host ID Collection tool on the PC that has LCT-BGF installed to collect the host ID information and then send the generated file to the sales force.

Upon receiving host ID information file, ECIC Supply Chain will generate the license key using License Generate Tool. Supply Chain fill the fields of Generate PO window as described below:

MAX NE Numbers(increment): 1 MAX SAM4 NE Numbers(increment): 1 MAX Ethernet Port Numbers(increment): 100 MAX MPLS Cards Numbers(increment): 100 MTNM I/F License: disable LCT License: 0

After the license key has been generated, Supply Chain will send it to customer.

Upon receiving the license key, customer should copy the license.dat file to the folder: \LCT-BGF\etc\.config, replacing the old license.date file.